Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutSenior Center Fire Protection SystemsADDENDUM NO, I CITE' OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO OCTOBER 22, 1996 The following changes, additions, clarifications andlor deletions are hereby made a part of the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project of the City of Meridian, Ada County, Idaho, as if the same were entirely set forth in the Bid Documents: Advertisement for Bids - Page 1-1 - The address given in the Advertisement for Bids is in error. The correct address of the Meridian Senior Center is 133 West Broadway, Meridian, Idaho. Also, Intermountain Contractor has moved to 110 N. 27th, Boise, Idaho. Add to the second paragraph of the Advertisement for Bids the requirement of a digital communicator for off-site monitoring, a UL 300 Liquid Kitchen Suppression System, and painting of all exposed piping. Should the bid price exceed available funding, the City of Meridian may negotiate with the Successful Bidder to deduct the price for painting of exposed piping. A revised Advertisement for Bids is attached. Information for Bidders - Page 1-2 - Correct the address in the last paragraph to read 133 W. Broadway. Bid Schedule of Items and Prices - A revised page 1-8 is attached incorporating the above revisions. General Conditions - Pages 2-21, 2-23, 2-24 - Sections 2.11.3.c. and 2.11.6.b . Delete these paragraphs in their entirety. The project is based solely on a lump sum bid for complete, operable systems. Any reference to a cost plus fee shall be deleted from the General Conditions. Davis -Bacon Wage Rates - Replace pages 1-7 of General Decision Number ID960003, Modification No. 4, dated 9/06/1996 and replace with the attached General Decision Number ID960003, Modification No. 4, dated 10/18/96. The City of Meridian Building Inspector, Daunt Whitman, indicates that the building has an occupancy designation of B-2 for the office area and A-3 for the assembly area. A list of those attending the mandatory pre-bid conference is attached. NOTICE NOTICE is hereby given that this Addendum must be signed and enclosed with the sealed bid for the City of Meridian 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project as evidence that the Bidder has familiarized himself with all changes incorporated herein. Name of Bidder: By: Name:- Date:- CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Separate sealed Bids for the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project will be received by the City Clerk of Meridian, Ada County, Idaho, the Owner, at the City Hall Building located at 33 East Idaho Avenue, Meridian, Idaho 83642, until 4:00 p.m., prevailing local time, October 31, 1996, and then publicly opened and read aloud. The work to be performed consists of furnishing and installing all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete and operable automatic fire sprinkler and alarm system for the existing Meridian Senior Center, 133 W. Broadway, Meridian, Idaho, including the appropriate connections to the existing Meridian water system. The system shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Building Code, 1994 Edition, and NFPA 13 and 72, and all cutting, patching, painting and repair of existing conditions shall be included. A digital communicator for off-site monitoring, a UL 300 Liquid Kitchen Suppression System, and painting of all exposed piping shall be included in the bid price. Should the bid price exceed available funding, the City of Meridian may negotiate with the Successful Bidder to deduct the price for painting of exposed piping. Bidders submitting exclusions with their bid shall be considered non-responsive. The City of Meridian reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all Bids. Copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained at the office of the Meridian Planning & Zoning Department upon payment of Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each set. Copies of the bidding documents have been supplied to the plan reading rooms of Intermountain Contractor and the Idaho Branch of Associated General Contractors, both located at 110 North 27th, Boise, Idaho. Each Bidder must deposit with his Bid security in the amount, form and subject to the conditions provided in the Information for Bidders. No contractor, subcontractor, or specialty contractor shall be required to have a current license as a Public Works Contractor in the State of Idaho in order to submit a bid on any project; however, at or prior to the award of the contract, the successful bidder and all subcontractors shall secure a Public Works Contractor's License. The Contractor understands the time required to secure the Public Works Contractor's License. A mandatory pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 10:00 a.m. on October 17, 1996, at the Meridian Senior Center located at 133 W. Broadway, Meridian. No Bidder may withdraw his Bid within thirty (30) days after the date of the opening thereof. Dated this 30th day of September, 1996. October 2,16, 1996 Publishing Dates Robert D. Corrie, Mayor Meridian, Idaho 1-1 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO BID SCHEDULE OF ITEMS AND PRICES Amounts are to be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern the extensions. Item Number Description Total for Item 1. Furnish all labor and materials to provide a complete automatic fire sprinkler and alarm system which meets the requirements of the Uniform Building Code and Uniform Fire Code, 1994 Editions, and NFPA 13 and 72, for the existing Meridian Senior Center. All non -heated areas shall be protected by a dry system. Bid to include all cutting, patching, painting and repair of existing construction, a digital communicator for off-site monitoring, a UL 300 Liquid Kitchen Suppression System, and painting of all exposed piping. Work shall also include the appropriate connections to the existing Meridian water system, complete, for the lump sum price of Dollars Cents 1 L. S. @ $ Complete $ 2. Furnish and install Project Sign in accordance with requirements outlined under Sign Requirements, page VI -47 and depicted on page VI -67 of the ICDBG General Conditions included in these Contract Documents, in place, complete, for the lump sum price of Dollars Cents 1 L. S. @ $ Complete $ TOTAL BID $ 1-8 General Decision Number ID960003 Superseded General Decision No. ID950003 State: Idaho Construction Type: BUILDING County(ies): ADA CANYON RECEIVED CBCT 21 1596 .1. •i.:DT QF Cp,,;%"Ct!..r BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential construction consisting of single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories) Modification Number 0 1 2 3 4 Publication Date 03/15/1996 06/07/1996 08/09/1996 09/06/1996 10/18/1996 ID960003 - 1 10/18/1996 OCT 21 '96 1?:00 208 334 2631 PAGE.02 COUNTY(ies): ADA CANYON BRID0002A 01/01/1992 Rates Fringes ADA COUNTY BRICKLAYERS 14.08 2.40 -------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0808B 01/01/1996 Fringes Rates g CARPENTERS 17.88 5.49 ----------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO29IG 06/01/1996 Rates Fringes ADA COUNTY - ELECTRICIANS 20.44 4.55+4.4% ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEV0038B 10/31/1995 Rates Fringes ADA COUNTY ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS 19.285 6.12+a Footnotes: a. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. Employer contributes 8% of the basic hourly rate for 5 years or more of service or 6% of the basic hourly rate for 6 months to 5 years of service as vacation pay credit. ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0732B 06/01/1996 Rates Fringes ADA COUNTY IRONWORKERS 18.24 7.055 ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABOO155B 01/01/1996 Fringes Rates g (Anyone working on HAZMAT jobs working with supplied air shall receive $1.00 per hour above classification) THERE IS A HAZMAT CLASSIFICATION IN EACH GROUP LABORERS: ID960003 - 2 10/18/1996 OCT 21 '96 17:00 208 334 2631 PAGE.03 ZONE 1: GROUP 1 15.38 5.70 GROUP 2 15.48 5.70 GROUP 3 15.58 5.70 GROUP 4 15.68 5.70 GROUP 5 15.73 5.70 GROUP 6 15.98 5.70 GROUP 7 16.23 5.70 GROUP 8 15.63 5.70 GROUP 9 15.78 5.70 GROUP 10 15.88 5.70 Zone Differential (Add to Zone 1 rate): Zone 2 - $1.00 LABORERS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: General laborers; Sloper, cleaning and grading; Form stripper; Concrete crew; Concrete curing crew; Carpenter tender; Asphalt laborer; Hopper tender; Flagman (including Pilot car); Watchman; Heater Tender; Stake jumper; Choker setters; Spreader and weighman; Scouring concrete; Rip Rap Man (hand placed); Crusher tender; Cribing and shoring (in open ditches); Machinery and parts cleaner; Leverman, manual or mechanical; Demolition, salvage; Landscaper; Tool roomman; Traffic Stripping Crew GROUP 2: Chuck tender; Driller tender; Air tampers; Gunnite nozzleman tender; Pipewrapper; Tar pot tender; Concrete sawyer; Concrete Grinder; Signalman, handling cement; Dumpman; Steam nozzleman; Air and water nozzleman (Green Cutter, Concrete); Vibrator (less than 411); Pumperete and grout pump crew; hydraulic Monitor; Hydro Blaster GROUP 3: Pipelayer, including sewer, drainage, sprinkler systems and water lines; Free Air Caisson; Jackhammer; Paving Breaker; Chipping Gun Concrete; Powderman Tender; Asphalt Raker; Gasoline powered Tamper; Electric Ballast Tamper; Sand Blasting; Form setter, airport paving; Gunman (Gunite); Manhole Setter; Hand guided machines, such as Roto Tillers, Trenchers, Post -Hole Diggers, Walking Garden Tractors, etc.; Cutting Torch GROUP 4: Hod Carrier; Mason Tender; Plaster Tender; Mason Tender (concrete); Terrazzo -Tile Tender GROUP 5: Highscaler; Wagon Drill; Grade Checker; Gunnite Nozzleman; Timber faller and bucker GROUP 6: Diamond Drills; Drillers on Drills with Manufacturers rating 3" or over GROUP 7: Powderman UNDERGROUND WORK ID960003 - 3 10/18/1996 OCT 21 '96 17.01 208 334 2631 PAGE.04 GROUP 8: Reboundman; Chucktender; Nipper; Dumpman; Vibrator (less than 4"); Brakeman; Mucker; Bullgang GROUP 9: Form Setter and Mover GROUP 10: Miners; Machineman; Timbermen; Steelmen; Drill Doctors; Spaders and Tuggers; Spilling and/or Caisson Workers; Vibrator (over 4") --------------------------------------------------------- * PAIN0477C 10/01/1996 ADA COUNTY Rates Fringes GLAZIERS 14.86 4.94 PAINTERS 1:3.00 2.41 ---------------------------------------.-------------------------- PIAS0219C 06/01/1996 CEMENT MASONS Rates Fringes ZONE 1 GROUP 1 14.56 8.35 GROUP 2 14.76 8.35 CEMENT MASONS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: - JOURNEYMAN CEMENT MASON (including but not limited to hand chipping and patching, all types grouting and pointing of all concrete constructions, screed setting including screed pins, dry packing of all concrete including Embeco, plugging and filling all voids, etc., concrete construction, waterproofing of concrete with Thoroseal or similar materials. GROUP 2: - CEMENT MASON (magnesite terazzo and mastic composition, two component epoxies, Clary and similar type screed operator, sandblasting of concrete for architectural finished only, Power chipping and bushhammer, all color concrete work, Power Trowel Operator, Power Grinder Operator, Gunnite and Composition Floor Layer). Zone Differential (Add to Zone 1 rates): - $1.00 ---------------------------------------•------------------------- PLUM0296C 06/01/1995 PLUMBERS ---------------------- ROOF0209B 06/01/1994 ROOFERS OCT 21 '96 17:01 Rates 21.62 ------------------ ID960003 - 4 Rates 14-85 Fringes 5.94 ---------------- r Fringes _ 4.07 10/IS/1996 20e 334 2631 PAGE.05 SHEE0213A 06/01/1995 SHEET METAL WORKER ------------------------------ Rates 19.60 Fringes 5.49 SUID1002A 03/01/1990 BRICKLAYERS: Rates Fringes CANYON COUNTY 11.73 DRYWALL HANGERS & FINSHERS: ADA COUNTY HANGERS 10.00 FINISHER 12.25 1.68 CANYON COUNTY FINISHERS 12.25 ELECTRICIANS: .99 CANYON COUNTY 11.18 1.50 PAINTERS (BRUSH): CANYON COUNTY 12.25 1.78 SOFT FLOOR LAYERS: ADA COUNTY 10.94 TILE SETTERS: ADA COUNTY 12.59 1.64 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: ADA COUNTY Air Compressor, Rubber Tired Tractor with Attachments 14.23 4.05 Front End & Overhead Loaders Up to 4 yds, Spreader, Tractor, Rubber Tired with Backhoe, Trenching Machine 14.91 4.05 Power Shovels & Draglines Under 1 yd 15.08 4.05 Asphalt Paver Self Propelled, Cranes up to 50 tons, Derrick, Loaders (Front -End & Overhead) Over 4 yds to 7 yds, shovel & Dragline 1 yd to 3 1/2 yds, Crawler type Tractor W/Attachments 15.08 4.05 TRUCK DRIVERS: ADA COUNTY 9.69 CANYON COUNTY ----------------------------- 12.23 Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (v) ) . In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates ID960003 - 5 10/18/1996 OCT 21 '96 17:02 208 334 2631 PAGE.06 listed under that identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N_ W. Washington, D_ C. 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in l.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W_ Washington, D. C. 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice! material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. ID960003 - 6 OCT 21 '96 17:02 10/18/1996 208 334 2631 PAGE.07 l 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION ID960003 - 7 10/1S/1996 OCT 21 196 17:02 208 334 2631 PAGE.08 62Alti nl;�,SD B36<Fa MAE 7-/ W i ea L I p �,, rz -, ( 144W r7kS4 st. IJoj- - n�t�rr�,o� t ( 375-1972 37S 7/59 11--,9 -Y 374-,9100 '3.7 7- 9- Y Z- r 44060 -t7,?90 Ck GRINNELL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMPANY, INC. 667 N. UNDER RD. MERIDIAN, ID 83642 CONTRACT LICENSE #11424 -AAA -4 (18) `PHONE (208) 887-1221 FAX (208) 887--1280 TO: LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL WE ARE SENDING YOU: 11 Attached 11 Under separate cover via Shop Drawings D Equipment Submittals Letter Hydraulic Calculations 0 0 & M Manuals Test Procedures the following items: Test Certificates aOther THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: - For approval�As requested 11 Please return corrected prints For your use For listing 11 Please return approved Prints REMARKS�� COPY TO: SIGNED: +3 '.;0; tU? of Idfl/w DEIVAltTHE'NI' of INSURANCE' 700 West State Street: Boise, Idaho 83720 t'houe (200)334-11370 State rive tlau+hal .Plan neview For Fire Sprinkler FEB 19 19�( And Standpipe System 1NS'1'RUC1'lONS TO PLAN REVIEWER •SubJeGT -ro REI.'D lNSpE.cTlo�y 1 • Circle i Item ictal; is incorrect or disapproved: 4�� 2•'bill in blank space with n information shown othe plan. APPROV�ll 3 • Draw line thru blanic opace it i t is "Not Applicable" ee CO1nI11eI]'I G & C1X C�c� j�;elrlt Plan noviewer's Nante: —"A �'(j �G'k� _ Dale: ••. 1. Project: iwCY t ill 14% 5 !Q IZ C-7j70Z— Contract No.: 11q�—� 2. Project Sheet Address: / 3 �lr `[?,�'Zp! j / 3. City: V1A.E92. t D [A .,J Stale: e 4. Fire Protection Contraclor Natne: 5. Fire Protection Contractor Street Address: • ��S 7 , G. City: Mel( � State:—C=P"-a Zip: 'c6- 3 �SCL •r 7. License / Registration No.: Phone No. 5�7-- j'L'L Fax No. ( ) 4 a G. Date Of Plan: J"Z1M7 Last Revision No.: Revision Dale: G.1 Signatu►o On Plan: /Jl CKnr I)elzsO N Certification No.: 9. Comments: _ 11. SITE PLAN: 11.1 Underground Fire Main Size: Located And Dimensioned: (�J N 0 11.2 City Water Main Size: �AUMNIft Y N 11.3 Y N Y N 11.4 ' hrus181ock Shown: Y O Y N e 11.5 Water Flow Test: Static psi is Z Residual psi: Zy GPM: .z 3cK-i 11.6 . 11.7 Hydrant Locations Shown: � N Distance to FDC: (teal) . ZZ efi .•.r � s 11.0 Y N 11.9 Adjacent Streets Willi Names and Location Shown: �(:YD N e 11.10 North Direction Indicated: iJ N Scale On Drawing Noted: (fJ N e 11.1 Y N 1.1 Paved Parking, Roads and Fire Lanes Are Indicated: Y 0 11.13 Fire Department Connection Location Is Accessible N Fire Department Connection Located On The Building Wall: - (JIT. 1 Exterior Alarm Device In An Acceptable and Visible Location: Y 11.1 G aler Motor Gong: r_..1 Light/Horn: Q Erect. Bell: ❑ Pago 1 12. HAZARD CLASSIFICATION: 12.1 Light Hazard: _ L/" Description: 12:2--BrdiRary-6rea;�• - � -��sctiptron---' 1Q.3--E-Ara-Ha iptien;- 12A -•General && ageighttNFP ity-Class: 124--r-eneraW"erage-Qva e!94" torage-kteight;. -__ 1--l3as"le+ag4Wk-t'A 231Gtc;raye t teiyht: In -Back -Heads?---• -'F- - N •{2:�--Jnter�eN-kese-Siak+er�IRfermat• equired:---------- x ---N Supply -From -Overhead -Syslern: Spppfy-From-Adjacent-OverheadSysteni N._, SuPllyts-Separate-Piping-Syslam. N 12.6 Applicable NEPA Standard: V13 ❑ 13R ❑ 13D ❑ 231 Cl 231 C ❑ Other: 12.9 Type Of System: ❑ Wet #Dry ❑ Pre -action ❑ Combined Dry /Preaction ❑ Antifreeze ❑ Deluge ❑ Foam ❑ Foam /Water ❑ Other: 12.10 System configuration: C(Tree C1 Looped Mains ❑ Grid 12.11 System Area Limitations: Light & Ordinary Hazard: 52000 sq. ft. Max: S-dU Wgreha0s"(3eneret-and-Rack-&"age-0ver42-it ) "^000 sq-it-Ma)c— Extra-Waza.W_(cafculated;---A0000-sq.-It-.Max.'__ Extra t faza►cf--(now-safculatcci� 25000 -sq -ft -Max:-- ._ Dry System Capacity: _ '2__e- J^ gal. Anti -freeze system gal. 12.12 System Design Criteria: Density: _ I -A . / Remote Area Size: / j'7i sq. it. 12.13 Remote Area Length Determined By: NFPA 13 (1.2 Remote Area Size) L411 Other: 12.14 Dry System Remote Area Increased by 30%: ( Minimum 1960 sq. it. �s''1 'w sq, ft. 13. , TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: (NFPA 13, 13A--Tvv9-5-nUDescriDIion of Obstructed ,nnstructinn- 13.2 13.3 Beam and Girder (Spacing 3-0 to 7-6 it. On Center) Size,,,"Spacing Composite Wood Joist (Spacing Less Than 3-0) rze: Spacing Panel Construction (Beams Spaced More Than 7- L On Center, Not over 300 sq. it. ) Beam Sizes: Spacing Wood Joist Construction: Size: Spacing Concrete Twin -M: Size: Spacing Other. Type and Description of Unobstructed Construction: Bar Joist: Size: Spacing Smooth Ceiling: St a and Mill Construction: Wood Truss Construction Size: Z . Plu RuN N�Et-Y►.L -Ol, r,� Other: Open Grid Ceilings: Spacing? Roof Construction: Combustible Non combustible 13.4 Ceiling Construction: Combustible Non combustible [_✓ _ 13.5 -All"p roofed 13.6. Fire Separation Walls /Smoke Barriers /Floor Penetrations Fire Caulked: N COU 13-7-Draft•Cart s teke-i'Heat-Vents 13.g- Gsytiyhtc /chis R� Y td Ceiling Elevation Defined ' �Y N 13.9 Hanger Material Defined N 13.10 Earthquake And/Or Sway Bracing Required: tJ Page 2 14. SPRINKLER HEAD SPACING AND INFORMATION: (NFPA 13 ( Due To New Or Possible Changes In LISTINGS Of Sprinkler Heads, It May 130 Necessary To Review A Copy Of The Latest Data Sheet Of the Product.) 14.1 Actual Head Spacing On Drawing: Light Hazard _ /_221 sq. It. P cr Head �r- '©ulinayr Wazar . tt. peg bead-- •E�rtra kiazardEipQ Scliedul �1t.-5er-He-ad— -Extra-i-tazard-Calculat Y t -per -Head High Ritad-s(erage uyitl ensity Below 25 CNfaR.13orsq-h— N'--9t' P- teraae-VYil ensity Over 25 -�t EJ$F-"�-'6k er-1 e'ds+M"x_10" a.9rop�prinkler} .C-xleudedzuvaraga-Updglu-or-E'.endent. Et-ftrper Head' sq. it. Sidewall-14oadsr{�able i- -�/- L•� lt 4oGa rio44-0 d! A ci'tt-Extended Grovel s Srna Pe Y Ai q• It. Other. rY 14.2 Deflector Distance Below Roof Or Ceiling: ( Refer To Listing Or Manufacturer's Data Sheets For Extended Coverage And Special Sprinklers, i.e. ESFR, Large Drop.) / Unobstructed Conshuction: Spray Heads 1" to 12" (An Exception May Apply) Sidewall Heads 4" to 6" (An Exception May Apply)y Obstructed-Gonstruc4ioa:--Spray-Heads._1=tuALWderStructura! Member. (Max,G-0 22-Below-Geiling4-Roos-Deck..) 14.3 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS: Min. 10" Clearance From Deflector To Top Of Storage: (Standard Head) ( D N Min.-Elearance-Frenu];eUectO�-P-CMOmge:-(SpeGaMead-Listing) Y N Temperature Ratings Identified: N ldeate�zeAes (t+FFP �Y--J ventitated7�tttc-(-7ll�Er3s'--,r.o-� a" - Unventilated Attic ( ) 1-15* -ry 22S' "ZUCj N SkylightsiGtas"r—Plastie);-UNverAilated-Show-Windows--( )y-ate_%ZSR Y J� —N--, Sin9�le-l-evot-0t-Sryrinklers-tn-Rask--(!1.165°F� YN--. MuWpls-Levef'ot*Sprinklers-t &-Defieotor�hield) 15. RISER AND VALVE ARRANGEMENT: Riser Check Valve, Except On Multiple Risers Or When FDC Is At Pit) �----------N-, 15.2 Single Dry Riser: ( FDC Connection To System Below Dry Pipe Valve And Above The Main Riser Gate Valve And Check Valve, Except On Multiple Risers Or When FDC is At Pi(.) 0YN S:3--MultiplwSgstem-RtserVatve-A Yemen itTi A•l;iny a d -in -Supply: --- ( Refer To Latest Edition Of NFPA 13, A 15.4--T4m-Require"etieWaly,&4s-Shown-On-r4-Wet-Grid-Syst 15.5 Water Pressure Gauges Are Provided Above and Below The Main Check Valve N 15.6 Is The Inspectors Test Connection Valve and Discharge Location Acceptable? N 15.%—Auxiiiafygrainso_hadicated-DrrSecondary-Mains-Of-Gridded-System - - Y -------N, 15.8 Are Auxiliary Drains And Discharge For Trapped Sections Of Piping Shown? N Other: COMMENTS THIS PAGE: Pago 3 ** TX CONFIRMATION REPORT ** DATE TIME TO/FROM 23 01/14 17:18 0+3756978 cc Q co O Exhibit A.5 - AS OF JAN 14 197 17:19 PAGE.01 CITY OF MERIDIAN MODE MIN/SEC PGS CMD# STATUS G3 --S 01'26" 002 167 OK y era Al VI -67 (96) med /ter 0/► an e� Ti�2 y L ��oa0 ` C E 0 O Q� L. ca Lu O w � I O W VI -67 (96) med /ter 0/► an e� Ti�2 y ��oa0 LL O L. ca Q � I I _.v U a. c p DO CD a:ca-� i oCc o o_a Lu c r b C2 (D a) VI -67 (96) med /ter 0/► an e� Ti�2 y C6 L. ca U a. CD a:ca-� CD c r b C2 (D a) ` L L C C71 O r • O t° ° 0 c - 0 o CD 3 = � = ° a IL v m. Q VI -67 (96) med /ter 0/► an e� Ti�2 y City of Meridian, Idaho - Downtown Street Improvements Akwsline..... ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Information Regarding East First Street Construction- .... September 16, 1991.�� Noll ----------------------------------------------------- SEGMENT TWO PAVING WORK IS SCHEDULED American Paving Company has scheduled their paving crews to blacktop East First Street from Pine Avenue north to the Apollo Cleaners starting on Tuesday morning, Sept. 17, 1991. Paving should be complete and driveable by Thursday afternoon, Sept. 19, 1991. The paving foreman indicates that, by Thursday evening, the new asphalt will be hard enough to accommodate heavy trucks. This accelerated paving work puts Segment Two blacktopping about two weeks ahead of schedule. All property owners, residents and tenants in Segment Two should make alternate plans for access during Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday of this week. Please do not leave any cars parked or unattended on East First Street during this paving period. NEW ASPHALT SOURCE IS APPROVED Nelson Construction Company is one of four hot mix asphalt plants in the Treasure Valley and they have been the primary source of asphalt for the East First Street project. Two weeks ago, the Nelson plant was moved to Bellevue, Idaho for repaving of several state highways in the Wood River Valley. To avoid paving delays on East First Street, the City of Meridian asked the Ada County Highway District (ACRD) to approve asphalt supplied by Nampa Paving Company. The Nampa asphalt is more expensive to haul to Meridian; however, this immediate source of asphalt has been authorized so Segment Two paving can be done September 17th, 18th and 19th. The City is doing everything possible to accelerate paving schedules. HUNTER LATERAL REPLACEMENT IS SCHEDULED Irrigation water is now shut down and the 30" Hunter Lateral in Pine Street is now dry enough to replace. American Paving Company crews will start excavation and pipe replacement on Wednesday, September 18, 1991. The large pipe will take one week to replace. When completed, an asphalt patch will be constructed. DOWNTOWN IMPROVEMENT COMMITTEE MEETING. The Meridian Chamber of Commerce, Downtown Improvement Committee, will be meeting at noon on Thursday, September 19, 1991, at the Sunrise Cafe to discuss downtown development topics. The meeting is open to all interested parties. WEEKLY COORDINATION MEETINGS AT CITY HALL Each Friday at 10:00 a.m. at City Hall, American Paving Co. and city officials will be meeting to review East First Street Construction. Any property, business owner or citizen is welcome to attend. ---------------------------------------------------------------- For more information or to ask questions, please contact: Mr. Wayne S. Forrey, Project Coordinator at 362-4332 during normal business hours; or early morning or evening at 362-6007 (home). You may also contact Mr. Terry Smith at 888-1516 or Mr. Jack Sweet at 888-4911, who are the Co -Chairmen of the Meridian Chamber of Commerce, Downtown Improvement Committee. I. Senior Citizen Center Rating and Ranking (Section 101.) Structural Problems: Roof, walls, foundations, floors Weatherization Expansion for adult day care facility Other Interior Problems: Bathrooms Handicapped access Electrical, plumbing, lighting _ — Heating and air conditioning — Fire safety Other Kitchen and Food Storage: Capacity Health inspection Other TOTALS: s • _• reirml 1.1 •.• i . a. Pm -planning (50 points)_ Describe the effort made to quantify the problems through inspections, architectural and engineering review, etc. �• =. • .��1` 1 •.• M, Describe the effort made to coordinate all of the various agencies that may be involved in funding and planning the project. Also included is all relevant information that all grant responsibilities and requirements have been included in the planning. APPENDIX NO. 10 1 GRAND TOTAL Points Points MERIDIAN CITY COUNCIL MEETING: October 4.1994 APPLICANT: MERIDIAN SENIOR CITIZEN CENTER AGENDA ITEM NUMBER: 9 REQUEST: MERIDIAN SENIOR CITIZEN CENTER REQUEST ASSISTANCE IN OBTAINING AN IDAHO COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT BLOCK GRANT AGENCY CITY CLERK: CITY ENGINEER: CITY PLANNING DIRECTOR: CITY ATTORNEY: CITY POLICE DEPT: CITY FIRE DEPT: CITY BUILDING DEPT: MERIDIAN SCHOOL DISTRICT: MERIDIAN POST OFFICE: ADA COUNTY HIGHWAY DISTRICT: ADA COUNTY STREET NAME COMMITTEE: CENTRAL DISTRICT HEALTH: NAMPA MERIDIAN IRRIGATION: SETTLERS IRRIGATION: IDAHO POWER: US WEST: INTERMOUNTAIN GAS: BUREAU OF RECLAMATION: OTHER: COMMENTS Meridian Area Senior Citizens Association, Inc. September 28, 1994 P.O. Box 606 - Meridian. Idaho 83680 - (208) 888-5555 To The City Clerk City of Meridian RECEIVED SEP 2 -3 1994 CITY OF MERIDIAN The Meridian Senior Center asks that it be included on your city council agenda Tuesday, October 4, 1994. The Meridian Senior Center will be requesting the city to help it obtain an Idaho Community Development Block Grant for the center. Respectfully submitted, Board Member Meridian Senior Center Meridian Area Senior Citizens Association.1 September 29, 1994 P.O. Box 606 - Meridian, Idaho 83680 - (208) 888-5555 Meridian City rcuncil NiPrrhEr:;: RECEIVED S E P 2 9 1994 CITY OF MERIDIAN The 'leridiarr Center re,_irrnsts ttle city e f tits r. idi an to ass'_st ?t in obt, 1ni"ng =,n 1ddihn Community UP'JPLop'flent. Block Grant in the &1rW.1e-nt of aoproximately $1n0,opg.,jo for the purpose of updating the re'!Itpr, making it safer, and more accessible to the over 620 seniors who come to the center. monthly. What_ the Meridian Senior Center needs: t. An overhead sprinkler system for fire protection*.'�-5016,v 2. Fire alarm system. 3. Areas of the center need to be renovated to meet handicap access codes. 4. Electrical, heating and air conditioning systems appear to be inadequate to handle demands. How the Meridian_ City Council can help: 1. Sponsor the center in its request. 2. Send a tetter of intent to apply for the grant. 3. Provide in-kind services, waived fees, and direct funds in the arnouint of 25% of the project cost. The seniors would appreciate your support and consideration to be included.:n your 1995 budget. Respectfully, President, Meridian Senior Center Meri&an Area Senior Citizens Association Inc. 133 W. Broadway • P.O. Box 606 • Meridian, Idaho 83680 (208) 888-5555 WHAT IS THE MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER? The center is 100% owned and directed by its' Senior Members. Members are all over the age of 60 years and reside in Ada County. It's a great way to become acquainted with others and take advantage of services and activities available to seniors. All seniors are welcome. WHAT PROGRAMS AND ACTIVITIES ARE OFFERED AT THE MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER? MEAL SITE: A daily average of 173 meals are served Monday thru Friday. Seniors' monetary donations are used to defray the cost of the meals. MEALS -ON-WHEELS: Volunteers deliver meals to homebound seniors in the Meridian Area. TRANSPORTATION: A van is available to transport seniors to the.meal site, doctor appointments, grocery shopping and on special occasions to a shopping mall, concerts, plays or area events. ACTIVITIES: Everyday something is happening! Participate in card games, crafts, ballroom dancing, parties, quilting, billiards, exercise classes, line -dancing, bazaars, pot lucks and more. PROGRAMS: Seminars and speakers are invited to update members on a variety of topics. INFORMATION & REFERRAL: Anyone in need of assistance or phone numbers regarding the following senior services are encouraged to call us: Home health care, homemakers services, legal aid, support groups, financial advise or assistance, housekeeping/home maintenance, energy assistance, dental access programs, phone reassurance, financial scams and others. VOLUNTEERS are needed to deliver meals -on -wheels and to answer phones. You don't have to be a senior to help us-- just call the phone number at the top of the page to become involved. We would really appreciate your help. BINGO --EVERY FRIDAY NITS!!! Early Bingo starts at 6:30 pm with our regular Bingo starting sharp at 7:00 pm. Hot-dogs, hamburgers, and other confections available at 5:30 pm. OUR BINGO GAMES ARE OPEN TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC!! RIVIAN SE NJ LlC,A'1'1VN,1NC. U1l�1C;I;ltS A[V1) 1jUAltl) V1' U1t1;C'1'U1ts (c(lcciivc I - i -yS) IN O*IT IONI; t L;IZfVI I;XI'I1tA'1 IC)N .101 1'1?1;Sll)I;N*I' 897-1780 /F Alel 19A/S111el - I)I;C. 11, I995 �3 ,.,- - JITRY KNOX xxx-5517 t)1;C. 11, 1995 VICI; r'RI;SIDFN I' WANDA I,OIJNS13OIZY 8,18-6654 SI;('IZI'1'ARY 1)I;C. 11, 1995 AL,I,I N I'l,Ilti1M1;IZ 178-0367 TR1;AS1)IZI IZ I)I'(� 11, 1995 13VA1tl) I111;(111il;ItS -AMIII;AIJ 888-9.367 f )I ;C.3 1, 1995 Mnl)ItIC'L; 1'1(.'I:f;S 898-7006 DIV. 31, 1995 RAY I;(.)N(; 376-19)9 DFC. 1995 MARY IIL;ATII 175-1916; DFC. ;31, 1996 I,I?511_:It MOt )IZ I ; 888-6.390 r )FC. 11, 1996 KL;1;1'ON NI(_'IlOI,S 911-�16xi DIV. :3I, 1996 I;S'I'AI,INI; IMINC► 897-2 126 1) FC. 31, 1997 DAI,I1IZYAN xxx 24114 DIV. :C'. 11, 1997 t,t�Clt,t,r; wOOr) 888-1115 1)FC. 1 I, 1997 (.)I- ICERS ARI; L�.r,l;(.'I I;I) I,OR A ONE YEAR �r'I?1ZM. I3(7AIZ1) Mt,M131;R,S ARI; i;I,i;�'I nAIS(Y111Ad I�r) r(:)R I IIIZL�1� YI�AIZ r TFItMS. CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SEPTEMBER 1996 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Paye Advertisement for Bids Information for Bidders 1-1 Bid 1-2 ...... 1-6 Bid Schedule of Items and Prices ..................................... 1-8 BidBond ....................................................... 1-10 Contract........................................................ 1-12 Notice of Award Acceptance of Notice of Award ...................................... 1-15 Performance Bond ................................................ 1-17 PaymentBond ................................................... 1-19 Notice to Proceed .............................................. 1-21 SECTION 2 - OWNER'S GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.1 Definitions ................................................ 2.2 Preliminary Matters ......................................... 2-1 2.3 Contract Documents; Intent and Reuse 2.4 ........................... Availability of Lands: Physical Conditions: Reference Points ........... 2-5 2-6 2.5 Bonds and Insurance 2.6 ........................................ Contractor's Responsibilities 2-7 2.7 .................................. Work by Others ............................................ 2-10 2.8 Owner's Responsibilities 2-17 2.9 ...................................... Owner's Status During Construction 2-17 2.10 ............................ Changes in the Work 2-18 2.11 ........................................ Change of Contract Price 2-20 2.12 ..................................... Change of the Contract Time 2-20 2.13 .................................. Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction, 2-24 Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work 2.14 ...................... Payments to Contractor and Completion 2-25 2.15 .......................... Suspension of Work and Termination 2-28 2.16 ............................ Arbitration 2-33 2.17 ................................................ Miscellaneous 2-34 .............................................. 2-35 SECTION 3 - ICDBG GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 4 - IDAHO CURRENT WAGE RATES CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS DEFINED TERM The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible Bidder to whom the OWNER makes an award. 2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOC'I IMFNTS Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the City of Meridian. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing the Bids. Neither the OWNER nor ENGINEER assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3. Q AFICATIQNS OF BIDDERS The OWNER may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the Work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the OWNER all such information and data for this purpose as the OWNER may request. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the OWNER that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligation of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. A conditional or aual_ified Bid will no hP co-pted. 4. EXAMINATION OF NTRA T DQCUMENTS DOCUMENTSAND SITE Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder must (1) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (2) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (3) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, riles and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; and (4) study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every requirement of Section 4 of the Information for Bidders and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work. A pre-bid conference will be held on October 17, 1996, at 10:00 a.m. at the Meridian Senior Center, 113 W. Broadway, Meridian. Attendance is mandatory. 1-2 5. INTERPRETATION All requests for interpretations about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the OWNER in writing. Replies will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as having received the Bidding Documents. Requests for interpretations received less than seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for opening of Bids will not be answered. Only interpretations answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6. BID SECIMTY Bid Security shall be made payable to the OWNER, in an amount of five percent (5%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified check or a Bid Bond on the form attached, or the Bidder's own form of Bid Bond containing the same conditions as set forth in the attached form of Bid Bond, issued by a Surety meeting the requirements of the OWNER'S General Conditions. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Contract Security, whereupon it will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Contract Security within fifteen (15) calendar days of the Notice of Award, the OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the OWNER believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the "effective date of the Agreement", which term is defined in the General Conditions, or the thirty-first day after the Bid opening. Bid Security of other Bidders will be returned within seven (7) days of the Bid opening. 7. CONTRACT TIME The number of days within which, or the date by which, the Work is to be completed is set forth in the Bid Form and will be included in the Agreement. 8. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. The Bid Forms must be completed in ink or by typewriter. The Bid Price of each item on the form must be stated in words and numerals. In case of a conflict, the words will take precedence. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president, or a vice - present, or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the signature. 1-3 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. The address to which communications regarding the Bid are to be directed must be shown. 10. SUBMISSION OF BIDS Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated and shall be included in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security and other required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation 'BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. Bidders submitting exclusions to their bid will be considered non- responsive. 11. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL, OF BIDS Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed, in the manner that a Bid must be executed, and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with the OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of the OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of his Bid, that Bidder may, upon approval of the OWNER, withdraw his Bid and the Bid Security will be returned. 12. OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be opened publicly and read at the designated time and place. 13. BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN All Bids shall remain open for thirty (30) calendar days after the day of the Bid opening, but the OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. V UM The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities, and the right to disregard all non -conforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. In evaluating Bids, the OWNER shall consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and unit prices, if requested in the Bid Forms. 1-4 The OWNER may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidders to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the OWNER'S satisfaction within the prescribed time. The OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any such evaluation to the OWNER'S satisfaction. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation by the OWNER indicates to the OWNER that the award will be in the best interests of the Project. If the Contract is to be awarded, the OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within five (5) days after the day of the Bid opening. 15. METHOD OF AWARD If, at the time the Contract is to be awarded, the lowest Total Bid submitted by a responsible Bidder does not exceed the amount of funds then estimated by the OWNER as available to finance the Project, the Contract will be awarded to said responsible Bidder. 16. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required Contract Security consisting of Performance and Payment Bonds. 17. SIGNING OFAGREEMENT When the OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by three (3) unsigned counterparts of the Agreement and other Contract Documents. Within seven (7) days thereafter, the Contractor shall sign and deliver all three (3) counterparts of the Agreement to the OWNER with the Performance and Payment Bond Documents attached. Within five (5) days thereafter, the OWNER will deliver a fully signed counterpart to the Contractor. All portions of the Contract Documents shall be fully signed by the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 18. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE This Public Works project is financed in part by Federal Aid funds; therefore, a Public Works License is required in order to submit a Bid. 1-5 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO 11 Proposal of (hereinafter called 'Bidder"), organized and existing under the laws of the State of * ,doing business as To the City of Meridian (hereinafter called the "Owner"). In compliance with the Advertisement for Bids and Information for Bidders for the construction of the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project, having examined the Contract Documents with related documents and the site of the proposed Work, and being familiar with all the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials and supplies and to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents within the time set forth therein and at the prices stated in the Bid Schedule of Items and Prices. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work required under the Contract Documents, of which this is a part. By submission of this Bid, each Bidder certifies, and in case of a joint Bid each party thereto certifies as to his own organization, that this Bid has been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement as to any matter relating to this Bid with any other Bidder or with any competitor. The Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially completed within one hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run, and completed within one hundred sixty (160) calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run. The Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to the liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work on time. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: *Insert "a corporation", "a partnership", or "an individual', as applicable. 1-6 All items are to be included in the Bid; no exclusions will be allowed. Bidders submitting exclusions will be considered non-responsive. The above prices shall include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work as called for. Prices shall also include all applicable taxes and fees. Respectfully submitted: By: Signature (Title) (Business Address) (Date) Public Works Contractor License Number (SEAL if Bid is by a corporation) 1-7 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO Amounts are to be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern the extensions. Item Number Description Total for Item Furnish all labor and materials to provide a complete automatic fire sprinkler and alarm system which meets the requirements of the Uniform Building Code and Uniform Fire Code, 1994 Editions, and NFPA 13 and 72, for the existing Meridian Senior Center. All non -heated areas shall be protected by a dry system. Bid to include all cutting, patching, painting and repair of existing construction. Work shall also include the appropriate connections to the existing Meridian water system, complete, for the lump sum price of Dollars Cents 1 L. S. @ $ Complete $ 2. Furnish and install Project Sign in accordance with requirements outlined under Sign Requirements, page VI -47 and depicted on page VI -67 of the ICDBG General Conditions included in these Contract Documents, in place, complete, for the lump sum price of Dollars Cents 1 L. S. @ $ Complete $ TOTAL BID $ 1-8 The stated price shall include all labor, materials, equipment, removal, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished Work as called for. The Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids. Bidders submitting exclusions as part of their bid will be considered non-responsive. The Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving Bids. Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of his Bid, the Bidder will execute the formal Contract within ten (10) days and deliver Performance and Payment Bonds. The Bid Security attached in the sum of Dollars ($ ) is to become the property of the Owner, in the event the Contract and Bond are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby. Respectfully submitted: By: Signature (Title) (Business Address) (Date) (Public Works Contractor License Number) 1-9 (SEAL if Bid is by a corporation) CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, , as Principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Meridian, Ada County, Idaho, as OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns. Signed this day of 11996. The condition of the above obligation is such that, whereas, the Principal has submitted to the OWNER a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof, to enter into a contract in writing, for the construction of the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project. NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected; or (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a Bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its Bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. 1-10 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of thern as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officer, the day and year first set forth above. SEAL Principal (if Bid is by a Corporation) By: Attest: Signature Signature Surety By: Witness:_ Signature Signature CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made this day of , 1996, by and between the City of Meridian, Idaho, hereinafter called the OWNER, and doing business as (an individual), or (a partnership), or (a corporation) located in the City of County of and State of , hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: 1. WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the construction of the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project. 2. CONTRACT TIME. a. The Work will be substantially complete within one hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in Section 2.2.3 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Section 2.14.13 of the General Conditions within one hundred sixty (160) calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run. b. Liquidated Damages: The OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that the OWNER could suffer financial loss if the Work is not substantially complete within the time as specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by the OWNER if the Work is not substantially complete on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that, as liquidated damages for delay, but not as a penalty, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the OWNER One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for each day that expires after the time as specified above for substantial completion until the Work is substantially complete. 3. CONTRACT PRICE. The OWNER shall pay the CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the sum of Dollars ($ ). 4. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. The CONTRACTOR shall submit an Application for Payment in accordance with Section 2.14 of the General Conditions. The approved Application for payment will be processed by the OWNER for payment at the first regularly scheduled monthly 1-12 Council meeting thereafter and paid within thirty (30) calendar days from that meeting. The Application for Payment must be approved by the City Engineer prior to processing. Upon Substantial Completion, the OWNER shall pay an amount to the CONTRACTOR of ninety-five percent (95%) of the Contract Price, less such amounts as the City Engineer shall determine in accordance with Section 2.14.7 of the General Conditions. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Section 2.14.13 of the General Conditions, the OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by the City Engineer. 5. INTEREST. All monies not paid when due as specified above shall bear interest at the current prime lending rate as established by the Farmers and Merchants State Bank plus two percent (2%). 6. C'ONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS. In order to induce the OWNER to enter into this Agreement, the CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality and with all local conditions and Federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work. 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR are made a part hereof and consist of the following: a. This Agreement. b. Performance Bond. C. Payment Bond. d. Notice of Award and Acceptance of Notice of Award. e. Notice to Proceed. f. Contractor's Bid. g. General Conditions and ICDBG Supplemental General Conditions h. Addenda numbers to , inclusive.. i. Any Modification, including Change Orders, duly delivered after execution of Agreement. 8. MISCELLANEOUS. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 2.1 of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically, but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited 1-13 by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR each bind himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused to be executed by their duly authorized officials, this Agreement in three (3) copies, each of which shall be deemed an original. This Agreement will be effective on 11996. (SEAL) ATTEST: Lo Name: William G Berg, Jr. Title: Cb Clerk OWNER: CITY OF MERIDIAN, ADA CO., IDAHO Name: Robert DCorrie Title: Mayor CONTRACTOR: (SEAL) By: Name: (Type) ATTEST: Title: Address: Name: (Type) Title: License No. 1-14 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO NOTICE OF AWARD To: PROJECT Description: City of Meridian 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project The Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above-described Work in response to its Advertisement for Bids and Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for items in the amount of You are required to fully execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance Bond, Payment Bond and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice to you, that is by , 1996. If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said Bonds within ten (10) calendar days from the date of this Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Bond. The Owner will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER. Dated this _ day of , 1996. CITY OF MERIDIAN OWNER M. Name: Robert D. Corrie Title: Mayor 1-15 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE OF AWARD Receipt of the NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged by , this the day of , 1996. CONTRACTOR By: Name: Title: (SEAL if Bid is by a corporation) 1-16 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO PERFORMANCE BOND KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a(n) ,hereinafter called Principal, (Individual, Partnership, or Corporation) and (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called "Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Meridian, hereinafter called the OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the _ day of , 1996, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of the 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertaking, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety and during the one (1) year guarantee period, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications. 1-17 PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRAC- TOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in (___) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this _ day of 11996. ATTEST: (Principal) Secretary Principal (SEAL) Witness as to Principal (Address) ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) By Signature (Address) Surety By Attorney -in -Fact Witness as to Surety Address (Address) NOTE: Date of Performance Bond must not be prior to the date of the Agreement. (If the CONTRACTOR is a Partnership, all partners should execute the Bond.) 1-18 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO PAYMENT BOND KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a(n) ,hereinafter called Principal, (Individual, Partnership, or Corporation) and (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called "Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Meridian, hereinafter called the OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the _ day of , 1996, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools consumed or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications. 1-19 PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRAC- TOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in (___) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this — day of , 1996. ATTEST: (Principal) Secretary Principal I:A (Address) NOTE: Date of Payment Bond must not be prior to the date of the Agreement. (If the CONTRACTOR is a Partnership, all partners should execute the Bond.) 1-20 Signature (SEAL) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety ATTEST: By Attorney -in -Fact (Surety) Secretary (SEAL) Witness as to Surety Address (Address) NOTE: Date of Payment Bond must not be prior to the date of the Agreement. (If the CONTRACTOR is a Partnership, all partners should execute the Bond.) 1-20 To: CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO CONTRACTOR Address NOTICE TO PROCEED Date: Project: 1996 Meridian Senior Center Automatic Fire Sprinkler & Alarm System Project You are hereby notified that the Contract Time for the construction of the above Project will commence to run on the _ day of , 1996. On that date, you are to start performing the Work and your other obligations under the Contract Documents. The dates of Substantial Completion and Final Completion are , 1996 and , 1997, respectively. OWNER: CITY OF MERIDIAN Ada County, Idaho LIM Name: Robert D. Corrie Title: Mayor — 1-21 CITY OF MERIDIAN 1996 MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER & ALARM SYSTEM PROJECT MERIDIAN, ADA COUNTY, IDAHO SECTION 2 nER'S GENERAL CONDITIONS 2.1 DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in other Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: Ad en : Written and/or graphic instruments issued prior to Bid opening which clarify, correct or change the bidding documents or the Contract Documents. m n : The written agreement between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed. Other Contract Documents may be attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment: The form accepted by the OWNER which is to be used by the CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payment and which is to include such supporting documentation as required by the Contract Documents. Bid: The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. Bonds: Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order: A written order to the CONTRACTOR signed by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued after the effective date of the Agreement. Contract Documents: The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR'S Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplemental General Conditions, the Specifications, the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price: The monies payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement. 2-1 Contract Time: The number of days as computed in accordance with Section 2.17.2 of the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR: The person, firm or corporation with whom the OWNER has entered into the Agreement. For materials supply contracts, CONTRACTOR shall be interpreted to mean supplier. Day: A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word "Work", refers to Work that is, in the OWNER'S opinion, unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to the OWNER'S recommendation of final payment. Drawings: The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by the OWNER and are referred to in the Contract Documents. Effective Date of the Agreement: The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective; but, if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. Field r : A written order issued by the OWNER which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with Section 2.10.2, but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Modification: (1) A written amendment of the Contract Documents signed by both parties; (2) a Change Order; or (3) a Field Order. A modification may only be issued after the effective date of the Agreement. Notice of Award: The written notice by the OWNER to the apparent successful Bidder stating that, upon compliance by the apparent successful Bidder with the conditions enumerated therein, within the time specified, the OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which the CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. OWNER: The public body or authority, corporation, association, partnership, or individual with whom the CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. PROJECT: The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2-2 Resident PROJECT Representative: The authorized representative of the OWNER who is assigned to the PROJECT or any part thereof. Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by the CONTRACTOR, a subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor and submitted by the CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications: Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor: An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with any other subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion: The date at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the OWNER as evidenced by his definitive acknowledgment of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it was intended; or, if there be no such acknowledgment issued, when final payment is due in accordance with Section 2.14.13. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Work: The entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 2.2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS Delivery of Bonds: 1. When the CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to the OWNER such Bonds as the CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance with Section 2.5.1. Copies of Documents: 2. The OWNER shall furnish to the CONTRACTOR up to three (3) copies as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2-3 Commencement of Contract Time Notice to Proceed: 3. The Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed; but, in no event shall the Contract Time commence to run later than the thirtieth (30th) day after the effective date of the Agreement. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within thirty (30) days after the effective date of the Agreement. Starting the PROJECT: 4. The CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences to run unless otherwise authorized in writing by the OWNER. Before Starting Construction: 5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to the OWNER any conflict, error or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR may discover; however, the CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless the CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. 6. Within ten (10) days after the effective date of the Agreement, unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for review and acceptance an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the various stages of the Work, a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing submissions, and a preliminary schedule of values of the Work. 7. Before any Work at the site is started, the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER certificates and other evidence of insurance requested by the OWNER which the CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Sections 2.5.3, 2.5.4 and 2.5.6. Preconstruction Conference: 8. Within twenty (20) days after the effective date of the Agreement, but before the CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the site, a conference will be held for review and acceptance of the schedules referred to in Section 2.2.6, to establish procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals and for processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a working under- standing among the parties to the Work. 2-4 2.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS' INTENT AND REUSE Intent: 1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. They may be altered only by a Modification. 2. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. If, during the performance of the Work, the CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, he shall report it to the OWNER in writing at once and before proceeding with the work affected thereby; however, the CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to the OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Specifications or Drawings unless the CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. 3. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to describe a complete PROJECT to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work that may reasonably be inferred from the Specifications or Drawings as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for. When words which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with such meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code in effect at the time of opening of Bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of the OWNER or CONTRACTOR, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the OWNER as provided for in Section 2.9.3. 4. The Contract Documents will be governed by the law of the place of the PROJECT. Reuse of Documents: 5. Neither the CONTRACTOR nor any subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents, or copies of any thereof, prepared by the OWNER; and they shall not reuse any of them on extensions of the PROJECT or any other project without written consent of the OWNER and specific written verification or adaptation by the OWNER. 2-5 2.4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS PHYSICAL CONDITIONS REFERENCE POINTS Availability of Lands: 1. The OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in the OWNER'S furnishing these lands or easements entitles him to an extension of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Section 2.12. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. Physical Conditions - Investigations and Reports: 2. Reference is made to the Owner's Supplemental General Conditions for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by the OWNER in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Unforeseen Physical Conditions: 3. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the OWNER in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or in an existing structure differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. The OWNER will promptly review those conditions to determine if further investigation or tests are necessary. Promptly thereafter, the OWNER shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions which differ materially from those intended in the Contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by the CONTRACTOR, a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. Reference Points: 4. The OWNER shall provide the necessary surveys for construction to establish reference points which, in his judgment, are necessary to enable the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work; shall protect and preserve the established reference points; and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall report to the OWNER whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. 2-6 2.5 BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance and Payment Bonds: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all the CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect until one (1) year after the date of Substantial Completion, except as otherwise provided by law. All Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed by the bidding documents and be executed by such Sureties as: 1) are licensed to conduct business in the state where the PROJECT is located; and 2) are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act. 2. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the CONTRACTOR is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent, or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the PROJECT is located, or it ceases to meet the requirements of clauses 1) and 2) of Section 2.5.1, the CONTRACTOR shall, within five (5) days thereafter, substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which shall be acceptable to the OWNER. CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance: 3. The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such comprehensive general liability and other insurance as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the CONTRACTOR'S performance of the Work and the CONTRACTOR'S other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether such performance is by the CONTRACTOR, by any subcontractor, by anyone directly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: a. Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; b. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the CONTRACTOR'S employees; C. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the CONTRACTOR'S employees; d. Claims for damages insured by personal injury liability coverage which are sustained 1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the CONTRACTOR, or 2) by any other person for any other reason; e. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 2-7 7. If the OWNER requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policy, the CONTRACTOR shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the OWNER by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the site, the CONTRACTOR will, in writing, advise the OWNER whether or not such other insurance has been procured by the CONTRACTOR. Waiver of Rights: 8. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other and the subcontractors and their agents and employees and against the ENGINEER and separate contractors (if any) and their subcontractors' agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance provided under Section 2.5.6 or any other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the OWNER as trustee. The CONTRACTOR shall require similar written waivers from each subcontractor in accordance with Section 2.6. 11 as applicable; each such waiver will be in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Section 2.5.8. Recut and Application of Proceeds: 9. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Section 2.5.6 shall be adjusted with the OWNER and made payable to the OWNER as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Section 2.5.10. The OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and he shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the monies so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. 10. The OWNER, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one (1) of the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen (15) days after the occurrence of loss to the OWNER'S exercise of this power. If such objection be made, the OWNER as trustee shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If required in writing by any party in interest, the OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of his duties. Acceptance of Insurance: 11. If the OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the insurance required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Sections 2.5.3 and 2.5.4 on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, the OWNER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing thereof within ten (10) days of the date of delivery of such certificates to the OWNER in accordance with Section 2.2.7. The CONTRACTOR will provide to the OWNER such additional information in respect of insurance provided by him as the OWNER may reasonably request. Failure by the OWNER to give any such notice of objection within the time provided shall 2-9 constitute acceptance of such insurance purchased by the CONTRACTOR as complying with the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization - Property Insurance: 12. If the OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with Section 2.14.10; provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. 2.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIE Supervision and Superintendence: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but the CONTRACTOR shall not be solely responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to the OWNER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR'S representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Labor, Materials and Equipment: 3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours, and the CONTRACTOR will not permit the performance of Work on Saturday or Sunday or any legal holiday without the OWNER'S written consent given. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water and sanitary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the Work. 2-10 5. All materials and equipment shall be as specified in the Contract Documents. If required by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence, reports of required tests, as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 6. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Equivalent Materials and Equipment: 7. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Drawings or Specifications by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the name is followed by words indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers or distributors may be accepted by the OWNER if sufficient information is submitted by the CONTRACTOR to allow the OWNER to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent to that named. The procedure for review by the OWNER will be as set forth in Sections 2.6.7.1 and 2.6.7.2. 7.1 Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted by the OWNER from anyone other than the CONTRACTOR. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall make written application to the OWNER for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of performing the same function as that specified. The application will state whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in the Drawings or Specifications to adapt the design to the substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified shall be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be considered by the OWNER in evaluating the proposed substitute. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish, at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, additional data about the proposed substitute. The OWNER will make the final decision of acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered or installed without the OWNER'S prior written acceptance. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish, at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. 7.2 The OWNER will record time required by the OWNER and the OWNER'S consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by the CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the Drawings or Specifications occasioned thereby. Whether or not the OWNER accepts a proposed substitute, the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the charges of the OWNER and the OWNER'S consultants for evaluating any proposed substitute. 2-11 Concerning Subcontractors: 8. The CONTRACTOR shall not employ any subcontractor or other person or organization (including those who are to furnish the principal items of material or equipment), whether initially or as a substitute, against whom the OWNER may have an objection. A subcontractor or other person or organization identified in writing to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR prior to the Notice of Award and not objected to in writing by the OWNER prior to the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to the OWNER. Acceptance of any subcontractor, other person or organization by the OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of any right of the OWNER to reject defective Work. If the OWNER, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any subcontractor, other person or organization proposed by the CONTRACTOR after the Notice of Award, the CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute and the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, other person or organization against whom the CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons and organizations directly or indirectly employed by them and of persons and organizations for whose acts any of them may be liable to the same extent that the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the CONTRACTOR. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the OWNER and any subcontractor or other person or organization having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of the OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any monies due any subcontractor or other person or organization, except as may otherwise be required by law. The OWNER may furnish to any subcontractor or other person or organization, to the extent practicable, evidence of amounts paid to the CONTRACTOR on account of specific Work done. 10. The sections of the Specifications and the identification of any Drawings shall not control the CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among subcontractors or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 11. All Work performed for the CONTRACTOR by a subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the CONTRACTOR and the subcontractor which specifically binds the subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of the OWNER and contains waiver provisions as required by Section 2.5.8. The CONTRACTOR shall pay each subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to Section 2.5.6. Patent Fees and Royalties: 12. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is subject to patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for 2-12 use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of the OWNER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by the OWNER in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER and anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Permits: 13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The OWNER may assist the CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility service companies for connections to the Work, and the OWNER shall pay all charges of such companies for capital costs related thereto. Laws and Regulations: 14. The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith, the CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by an appropriate Modification. If the CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom; however, it shall not be the CONTRACTOR'S primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Taxes: 15. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by him in accordance with the law of the place of the PROJECT. Use of Premises: 16. The CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workmen to areas permitted by law, ordinances, easements, permits or the requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. 2-13 17. During the progress of the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by the OWNER. The CONTRAC- TOR shall restore to their original condition those portions of the site not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 18. The CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. Record Documents: 19. The CONTRACTOR shall keep one (1) record copy of all Specifications, Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, Shop Drawings and samples at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be available to the OWNER for examination and shall be delivered to the OWNER upon completion of the Work. Safety and Protection: 20. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: a. all employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; b. all the Work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and C. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement during the course of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. The CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph "a" or "b" above caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by the CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of the Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of the OWNER or anyone employed by either of them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not 2-14 attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of the CONTRAC- TOR). The CONTRACTOR'S duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and the OWNER has issued a notice to the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 2.14.13 that the Work is acceptable. 21. The CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the CONTRACTOR'S superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER. Emergencies: 22. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, the CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from the OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. The CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER prompt written notice of any significant changes in the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. Shop Drawings and Samples: 23. After checking and verifying all field measurements, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for review, in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see Section 2.2.8), five (5) copies of all Shop Drawings, which shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR and identified as the OWNER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction and like information to enable the OWNER to review the information as required. 24. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit to the OWNER for review, with such promptness as to cause no delay in the Work, all samples required by the Contract Documents. All samples shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of the CONTRACTOR, identified clearly as to material, manufacturer, any pertinent catalog numbers and the use for which intended. 25. At the time of each submission, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing, call the OWNER'S attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 26. The OWNER will review with reasonable promptness the Shop Drawings and samples, but the OWNER'S review shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the PROJECT and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, sequences, techniques or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the OWNER and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and resubmit new samples for review. The CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by the OWNER on previous submittals. The CONTRACTOR'S 2-15 stamp of approval on any Shop Drawing or sample shall constitute a representation to the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR has either determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that the CONTRACTOR has reviewed or coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 27. Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the Specifications, no related Work shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the OWNER. 28. The OWNER'S review of Shop Drawings or samples shall not relieve the CONTRAC- TOR from responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless the CONTRACTOR has, in writing, called the OWNER'S attention to such deviation at the time of submission and the OWNER has given written concurrence to the specific deviation, nor shall any concurrence by the OWNER relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings. Continuing the Work: 29. The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the CONTRACTOR and OWNER may otherwise agree in writing. Indemnification: 30. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless the OWNER and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense: 1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use of tangible property resulting therefrom; and 2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontrac- tor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 31. In any and all claims against the OWNER or any of its agents or employees by any employee of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 2.6.30 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 32. The obligations of the CONTRACTOR under Section 2.6.30 shall not extend to the liability of the OWNER, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifications. 2-16 2.7 WORK BY OTHERS 1. The OWNER may perform additional work related to the PROJECT by himself, or have additional work performed by utility service companies, or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these. The CONTRACTOR shall afford the utility service companies and the other contractors who are parties to such direct contracts (or the OWNER, if the OWNER is performing the additional work with the OWNER'S employees) reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. 2. If any part of the CONTRACTOR'S Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the work of any such other contractor or utility service company (or the OWNER), the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to the OWNER in writing any patent or apparent defects or deficiencies in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. The CONTRACTOR'S failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with the CONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent or non -apparent defects and deficiencies in the other work. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of his Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. The CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of the OWNER and the others whose work will be affected. 4. If the performance of additional work by other contractors or utility service companies or the OWNER was not noted in the Contract Documents, written notice thereof shall be given to the CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such additional work. If the CONTRACTOR believes that the performance of such additional work by the OWNER or others involves additional expense to the CONTRACTOR or requires an extension of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Sections 2.11 and 2.12. 2.8 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIE 1. The OWNER shall issue all communications directly to the CONTRACTOR. 2. The OWNER shall furnish the data required of the OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to the CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as provided in Sections 2.14.4 and 2.14.13. 3. The OWNER'S duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.4, respectively. Section 2.4.2 refers to the OWNER'S identifying and making available to the CONTRACTOR copies of reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting performance of the Work which have been relied upon by the OWNER in preparing the Drawings and Specifications. 2-17 4. The OWNER'S responsibilities in respect of purchasing and maintaining liability insurance is set forth in Section 2.5.5. 5. In connection with the OWNER'S rights to request changes in the Work in accordance with Section 2. 10, the OWNER, especially in certain instances as provided in Section 2.10.4, is obligated to execute Change Orders. 6. The OWNER'S responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in Section 2.13.4. 7. In connection with the OWNER'S right to stop Work or suspend Work, see Sections 2.13.10 and 2.15.1. Section 2.15.2 deals with the OWNER'S right to terminate services of the CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. 2.9 OWNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION Visits to Site: 1. The OWNER will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The OWNER'S efforts will be directed toward providing a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site observations, the OWNER will monitor the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Clarifications and Interpretations: 2. The OWNER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as the OWNER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Section 2.11 or Section 2.12. Unacceptable Work: 3. The OWNER shall have the authority to declare Work either acceptable or unacceptable and shall also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Section 2.13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. PROJECT Representation: 4. The OWNER may furnish Resident PROJECT Representatives to assist the OWNER in observing the performance of the Work. 2-18 Decisions on Disagreements: 5. The OWNER may be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the execution and progress of the Work shall be referred to the OWNER in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph, which the OWNER will render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such claim, dispute and other similar matter shall be delivered by the claimant to the OWNER and the other party to the Agreement within fifteen (15) days of the occurrence of the event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to the OWNER and the other party within forty-five (45) days of such occurrence unless the OWNER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data. 6. The rendering of a decision by the OWNER pursuant to Section 2.9.8 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in Section 2.14.16) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or at law in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter. Limitations on OWNER'S Recnonsibilities: 7. Neither the OWNER'S authority to act under this Section 2.9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, nor any decision made by the OWNER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor, or any of their agents or employees or any other person performing any of the Work. 8. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", of or "satisfactory", or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe requirement, direction, review or judgment of the OWNER as to the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective never indicates that the OWNER shall have authority to supervise or direct performance of the Work or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Section 2.9. 11 or 2.9.12. 9. The OWNER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and the OWNER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 10. The OWNER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR or any subcontractors, or of the agents or employees of any contractor or subcontractor, or of any other persons at the site or otherwise performing any of the Work. 2-19 •► h a V, M VATIJ: 1. Without invalidating the Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work; these will be authorized by Change Orders. Upon receipt of a Change Order, the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the Work involved. All such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. If any Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment will be made as provided in Section 2.11 or Section 2.12 on the basis of a claim made by either party. 2. The OWNER may authorize minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, which are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and shall be binding on the OWNER, and also on the CONTRACTOR, who shall perform the change promptly. If the CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Section 2.11 or Section 2.12. 3. Additional Work performed without authorization of a Change Order will not entitle the CONTRACTOR to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Section 2.6.22 and except as provided in Sections 2.10.2 and 2.13.9. 4. The OWNER shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering changes in the Work which are required by the OWNER, or required because of unforeseen physical conditions or emergencies, or because of uncovering Work found not to be defective, or as provided in Sections 2.11.9 or 2.11.10, or because of any other claim of the CONTRACTOR for a change in the Contract Time or the Contract Price which is approved by the OWNER. 5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or change in the Contract Price is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to the Surety, it will be the CONTRAC- TOR'S responsibility to so notify the Surety, and the amount of each applicable Bond shall be adjusted accordingly. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish proof of such adjustment to the OWNER. 2.11 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRIC_ 1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to the CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by the CONTRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the Contract Price. 2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an increase in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered to the OWNER within fifteen (15) days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within forty-five (45) days of such occurrence unless the OWNER allows an additional period of time to ascertain accurate cost data. All claims for adjustment in the 2-20 Contract Price shall be determined by the OWNER. Any change in the Contract Price resulting from any such claims shall be incorporated in a Change Order. I The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways: a. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Section 2.11.9. b. By mutual acceptance of a lump sum. C. On the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Sections 2.11.4 and 2.11.5) plus a Contractor's Fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Section 2.11.6). • • MIMMYS 4. The term "Cost of the Work" means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by the CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the PROTECT, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Section 2.11.5: a. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not employed full-time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or workmen's compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall include superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday or Sunday, or legal holidays shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by the OWNER. b. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and manufacturers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to the CONTRACTOR unless the OWNER deposits funds with the CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to the OWNER. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds, and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. C. Payments shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to the subcontractors for Work performed by subcontractors. If required by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain 2-21 competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to the CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to the OWNER who will then determine which bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that the subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a Fee, the subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in the same manner as the CONTRACTOR'S Cost of the Work. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. d. Costs of special consultants including, but not limited to, engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, lawyers and accountants employed for services specifically related to the Work. e. Supplemental costs including the following: (1) The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of the CONTRACTOR'S employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. (2) Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workmen, which are consumed in performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of the CONTRACTOR. (3) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof, whether rented from the CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by the OWNER and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof - all in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. (4) Sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which the CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by any governmental authority. (5) Deposits lost for causes other than the CONTRACTOR'S negligence, royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. (6) Losses and damages (and related expenses), not compensated by insurance or otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by the CONTRACTOR in connection with the execution of the Work, provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of the OWNER. No such losses, damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contractor's Fee. If, however, any such loss or damage required reconstruction and the CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in Section 2.11.6.2. (7) The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 2-22 (8) Minor expenses such as telegrams, long-distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. (9) Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work. 5. The term "Cost of the Work" shall not include any of the following: a. Payroll costs and other compensation of the CONTRACTOR'S officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, lawyers, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by the CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in his principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph "a" under Section 2.11.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's Fee. b. Expenses of the CONTRACTOR'S principal and branch offices other than the CONTRACTOR'S office at the site. C. Any part of the CONTRACTOR'S capital expenses, including interest on the CONTRACTOR'S capital employed for the Work and charges against the CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. d. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not the CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work). e. Costs due to the negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable including, but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property. f. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Section 2.11.4. Contractor's Fee: 6. The Contractor's Fee allowed to the CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: a. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or, if none can be agreed upon, Work: b. a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the 2-23 (1) for costs incurred under Section 2.11.4, paragraph "a" through paragraph "b", the Contractor's Fee shall be fifteen percent (15%); (2) for costs incurred under Section 2.11.4, paragraph "c", the Contractor's Fee shall be five percent (5%); and, if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to the subcontractor as a fee for overhead and profit shall be ten percent (10%); and (3) no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Section 2.11.4, paragraphs "d" and "e", and Section 2.11.5. 7. The amount of credit to be allowed by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the combined overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any. AAjustment of Unit Prices: 8. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant to Sections 2.11.4 and 2.11.5, the CONTRACTOR will submit in a form acceptable to the OWNER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 9. Where the quantity of Work with respect to any item that is covered by a unit price differs materially and significantly from the quantity of such Work indicated in the Contract Documents, an appropriate Change Order shall be issued to adjust the unit price. Cash Allowances: 10. It is understood that the CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done by such subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers or distributors and for such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to the OWNER. Upon final payment, the Contract Price shall be adjusted as required and an appropriate Change Order issued. The CONTRACTOR agrees that the original Contract Price includes such sums as the CONTRACTOR deems proper for costs and profit on account of cash allowances. No demand for additional cost or profit in connection therewith will be valid. 2.12 CHANGE OF THE CONTRACT TIME 1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an extension in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered to the OWNER within fifteen (15) days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within forty-five (45) days of such occurrence unless the OWNER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time shall be determined by the OWNER. Any change in the Contract Time resulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order. 2-24 2. The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of the CONTRACTOR if a claim is made therefor as provided in Section 2.12.1. Such delays shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by the OWNER or others performing additional Work as contemplated by Section 2.7, or to fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. 3. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this Section 2.12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including compensation for additional professional services) for delay by either party. 2.13 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRFC'TION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK Warranty and Guarantee: 1. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the OWNER that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to the CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Section 2.13. Access to Work 2. The OWNER and OWNER'S representatives, testing agencies and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection and testing. The CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access. Tests and Inspections: 3. The CONTRACTOR shall give the OWNER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. 4. If any law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code or order of any public body having jurisdiction requires any Work (or part thereof) to specifically be inspected, tested or approved, the CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish the OWNER the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with the OWNER'S acceptance of a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor of materials or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to the CONTRACTOR'S purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. The cost of all other inspections, tests and approvals required by the Contract Documents shall be paid by the OWNER, unless otherwise specified. 2-25 5. All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code or order of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6. If any Work that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered without written concurrence of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER, be uncovered for observation. Such uncovering shall be at the CONTRACTOR'S expense unless the CONTRACTOR has given the OWNER timely notice of the CONTRACTOR'S intention to cover such Work and the OWNER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 7. Neither observations by the OWNER nor inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Uncovering Work: 8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or ENGINEER, be uncovered for the OWNER'S observation and replaced at the CONTRACTORS expense. 9. If the OWNER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by the OWNER or inspected or tested by others, the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as the OWNER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction, including compensation to the OWNER for additional professional services, and an appropriate deductive Change Order shall be issued. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction if he makes a claim therefor as provided in Sections 2.11 and 2.12. OWNER May Stop the Work: 10. If the Work is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or any other party. • •N • • • K • 11. If required by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER, either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, 2-26 if the Work has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non - defective Work. One -Year Correction Period: 12. If, within one (1) year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER and in accordance with the OWNER'S written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non -defective Work. If the CONTRAC- TOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal and replacement, including compensation for additional professional services, shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. Acceptance of Defective Work: 13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the OWNER prefers to accept it, the OWNER may do so. In such case, if acceptance occurs prior to the OWNER'S final payment, a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Contract Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER. OWNER May Correct Defective Work: 14. If the CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of the OWNER to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by the OWNER in accordance with Section 2.13.11, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including any requirements of the progress schedule), the OWNER may, after seven (7) days of the written notice to the CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising his rights under this paragraph, the OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. To the extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, the OWNER may exclude the CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend the CONTRACTOR'S services related thereto, take possession of the CONTRACTOR'S tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR, but which are stored elsewhere. The CONTRACTOR shall allow the OWNER, OWNER'S representatives, agents and employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable the OWNER to exercise his rights under this paragraph. All direct and indirect costs of the OWNER in exercising such rights shall be charged against the CONTRACTOR in an amount verified by the OWNER, and a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents and a reduction in the Contract Price. Such direct and indirect costs shall include, in 2-27 particular but without limitation, compensation for additional professional services required and all costs of repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of the CONTRACTOR'S defective Work. The CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the OWNER of OWNER'S rights hereunder. Schedules: 1. At least ten (10) days prior to submitting the first Application for a progress payment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER a progress schedule, a final schedule of Shop Drawing submission and, where applicable, a schedule of values of the Work. These schedules shall be satisfactory in form and substance to the OWNER. The schedule of values shall include quantities and unit prices aggregating the Contract Price, and shall subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Upon acceptance of the schedule of values by the OWNER, it shall be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to the OWNER. Application for Progress P ent: 2. At least ten (10) days before each progress payment falls due, but not more than once a month, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents and also as the OWNER may reasonably require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at any other location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by such data, satisfactory to the OWNER, as will establish the OWNER'S title to the material and equipment and protect the OWNER'S interest therein, including applicable insurance. Each subsequent Application for Payment shall include an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied to discharge in full all of the CONTRACTOR'S obligations reflected in prior Applications for Payment. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title: 3. The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the PROJECT or not, will pass to the OWNER at the time of payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances, hereafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens". 2-28 Review of Applications for Progress Payments: 4. The OWNER will, within ten (10) days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either approve of payment or return the Application to the CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the OWNER'S reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The OWNER shall, within thirty (30) days of presentation to him of the Application for Payment, pay the CONTRACTOR the amount recommended. 5. The OWNER'S approval of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by the OWNER, based on the OWNER'S on-site observations of the Work in progress and on the OWNER'S review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of the OWNER'S knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning PROJECT upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents and any qualifications stated in the recommendation; and that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommended. However, by approving any such payment, the OWNER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work, or that the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction have been reviewed or that any examination has been made to ascertain how or for what purpose the CONTRACTOR has used the monies paid or to be paid to the CONTRACTOR on account of the Contract Price, or that title to any Work, materials or equipment has passed to the OWNER free and clear of any Liens. 6. The OWNER'S approval of final payment will constitute an additional representation that the conditions precedent to the CONTRACTOR'S being entitled to final payment as set forth in Section 2.14.13 have been fulfilled. 7. The OWNER may refuse to approve the whole or any part of any payment if, in his opinion, it is incorrect. He may also refuse to approve any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previ- ously approved to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. written claims have been made against the OWNER or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work; C. the Contract Price has been reduced because of Modifications; d. the OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 2.13.14; 2-29 e. of the CONTRACTOR'S unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or f. the CONTRACTOR'S failure to make payment to subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment. Substantial Completion: 8. When the CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use, the CONTRACTOR shall, in writing to the OWNER, certify that the entire Work is substantially complete and request that the OWNER issue a statement of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If the OWNER does not consider the Work substantially complete, the OWNER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, giving his reasons therefor. If the OWNER considers the Work substantially complete, the OWNER will prepare a tentative statement of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the statement a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. At the time of issuance of the tentative statement of Substantial Completion, the OWNER will deliver to the CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities and insurance. Unless the OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing, the OWNER'S aforesaid recommendation will be binding on the OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. 9. The OWNER shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but the OWNER shall allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. Partial Utilization: 10. Use by the OWNER of completed portions of the Work maybe accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following: a. The OWNER at any time may request the CONTRACTOR in writing to permit the OWNER to use any part of the Work which the OWNER believes to be substantially complete and which may be so used without significant interference with construction of the other parts of the Work. If the CONTRACTOR agrees, the CONTRACTOR will certify to the OWNER that said part of the Work is substantially complete and request the OWNER to issue a statement of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If the OWNER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the OWNER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, giving his reasons therefor. If the OWNER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the OWNER will execute and deliver to the CONTRACTOR a statement to that effect, fixing the date of Substantial Completion as to that part of the Work, attaching thereto a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final 2-30 payment. Prior to issuing a statement of Substantial Completion as to part of the work, the OWNER will deliver to the CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to the division of responsibilities Pending final payment between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities and insurance for that part of the Work which shall become binding upon the OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time of issuing the definitive statement of Substantial Completion as to that part of the Work unless the OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall have otherwise agreed in writing. The OWNER shall have the right to exclude the CONTRACTOR from any part of the Work which the OWNER has so stated to be substantially complete, but the OWNER shall allow the CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. b. In lieu of the issuance of a statement of Substantial Completion as to part of the Work, the OWNER may take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or not it is substantially complete if such facility is functionally and separately usable; provided that prior to any such takeover, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR have agreed as to the division of responsibilities between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR for security, operation, safety, maintenance, correction period, heat, utilities and insurance with respect to such facility. C. No occupancy of a part of the Work or taking over of operations of a facility will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of Section 2.5.12 in respect of property insurance. Final Inspection: 11. Upon written notice from the CONTRACTOR that the Work is complete, the OWNER will make a final inspection with the CONTRACTOR and will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies. Final Application for Payment: 12. After the CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of the OWNER and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents and other documents, all as required by the Contract Documents, and after the OWNER has indicated that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Section 2.14.16, the CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents and such other data and schedules as the OWNER may reasonably require, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu thereof, and as approved by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full; an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the OWNER or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the Surety, if any, to final payment. If any subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor fails to furnish 2-31 a release or receipt in full, the CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the OWNER to indemnify the OWNER against any Lien. Final Payment and Acce t nce: 13. If, on the basis of the OWNER'S observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and the OWNER'S review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, the OWNER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and the CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all of his obligations under the Contract Documents, the OWNER will, within ten (10) days after receipt of the final Application for Payment approve the Application for Payment. Otherwise, the OWNER will return the Application to the CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to approve final payment, in which case the CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the OWNER shall, within thirty (30) days after receipt thereof, pay the CONTRACTOR the approved amount. 14. If, through no fault of the CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed thereof, the OWNER shall, upon receipt of the CONTRACTOR'S final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 2.5.1, the written consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. CONTRACTOR'S Con tinuing�bligation: 15. The CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither issuance of a statement of Substantial Completion, nor any payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by the OWNER, nor any act of acceptance by the OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability by the OWNER pursuant to Section 2.14.13, nor any correction of defective Work by OWNER shall constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Waiver of Claims: 16. The making and acceptance of final payment shall constitute: a. a waiver of all claims by the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Section 2.14. 11 or from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special 2-32 guarantees specified therein; however, it shall not constitute a waiver by the OWNER of any rights in respect of the CONTRACTOR'S continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and b. a waiver of all claims made by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. OWNER Ma suspend Work: 1. The OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to the CONTRACTOR and OWNER which shall fix the date on which Work shall be resumed. The CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. The CONTRACTOR will be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension if he makes a claim therefor as provided in Sections 2.11 and 2.12. OWNER May Terminate: 2. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: a. if the CONTRACTOR is adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent; b. if the CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; C. if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the CONTRACTOR or for any of the CONTRACTOR'S property; d. if the CONTRACTOR files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or similar laws; e. if the CONTRACTOR repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment; f. if the CONTRACTOR repeatedly fails to make prompt payments to subcontrac- tors or for labor, materials or equipment; g. if the CONTRACTOR disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public body having jurisdiction; h. if the CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of the OWNER; or i. if the CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; 2-33 The OWNER may, after giving the CONTRACTOR and his Surety seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the services of the CONTRACTOR, exclude the CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all the CONTRACTOR'S tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by the CONTRACTOR (without liability to the CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the OWNER has paid the CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the OWNER may deem expedient. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the Work, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to the OWNER. Such costs incurred by the OWNER shall be incorporated in a Change Order, but in finishing the Work, the OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest figure for the Work performed. 3. Where the CONTRACTOR'S services have been so terminated by the OWNER, the termination shall not affect any rights of the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies due the CONTRACTOR by the OWNER will not release the CONTRACTOR from liability. 4. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: 5. If, through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or the OWNER fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the OWNER fails for sixty (60) days to pay the CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the OWNER, terminate the Agreement and recover from the OWNER payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. In addition, and in lieu of terminating the Agreement, if the OWNER has failed to act on an Application for Payment or the OWNER has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the OWNER, stop the Work until payment of all amounts then due. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligations under Section 2.6.29 to carry on the Work in accordance with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes and disagreements with the OWNER. 2.16 ARBITRATION 1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of� or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except 2-34 for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Section 2.14.16, may be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then pertaining subject to the limitations of this Section 2.16. This agreement so to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into in accordance herewith as provided in this Section 2.16 will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration law of any court having jurisdiction. 2. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be sent to the OWNER for information. The demand for arbitration shall be made within the thirty (3 0) day period specified in Section 2.16.2 where applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 3. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner any other person or entity, his agents, employees or consultants, who is not a party to this Agreement unless: a. the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration; b. such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings; and C. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and of the OWNER and CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any other party not specifically identified in such consent. 4. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to modification or appeal except to the extent permitted by Sections 10 and 11 of the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. 10, 11). I_R-BIRTIUMM Giving Notice: 1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it shall be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 2-35 Computation of Time: 2. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday, or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day shall be omitted from the computation. General: 3. Should the OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to his person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. 4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon the CONTRACTOR by Sections 2.6.30, 2.13.1, 2.13.11, 2.13.14, 2.14.3 and 2.15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to the OWNER there- under, shall be in addition to, and shall not be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by law or contract, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph shall be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All representations, warranties and guarantees made in the Contract Documents shall survive final payment and termination or completion of this Agreement. 2-36 --/-,*"4 FIRE PROTECTION OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MERIDIAN SENIOR CENTER MERIDIAN, IDAHO 1--y4 GRINNELL FIRE PROTECTION 657 NORTH LINDER ROAD MERIDIAN IDAHO 83642 (208) 887-1221 � ALL MATERIALS FOR THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS WERE PURCHASED THROUGH: GRINNELL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 657 LINDER ROAD MERIDIAN, IDAHO 83642 208-887-1221 n Grinnell FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMPANY 657 N. Linder Road Meridian, ID 83642 Tel: 208-887-1221 Fax: 208-887-1280 WARRANTY In accordance with the contract dated December 16, 1996, between the City of Meridian, Idaho, and Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Company for the sprinkler system installed for the Meridian Senior Center, located at 133 W. Broadway, Meridian, ID. We hereby guarantee to make good, without cost to the Owners or General Contractor any and all defects due to imperfect workmanship or materials which may appear during the period March 31, 1997 through March 30, 1998. This guarantee is specifically limited to the extent that we replace any materials proved defective when used for the purpose manufactured and rectify imperfect workmanship without cost to the Owners. It is further stated that Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Company, Inc. does not guarantee the operation of the system. System is turned over to owner in service and in full operating capacity. System maintenance, supervision, and liability becomes the Owners responsibility throughout this warranty. GRINNELL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMPANY, INC. Jeffrey M. Wilcheck Manager, Boise Operations A tgC:C INTERNATIONAL LTD. COMPANY DRY PIPE VALVE TRIP TEST REPORT GRNMI FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMPANY, INC. f EXECUTIVE OFFICES • IOOORRANCE STREET PROVIDENCE. R.1, 02901 • 401-456-5600 F to VL I Benn INSPECTION NO. •�� � STREET l+ ` CITY ,r `e�2'�Ltµrl STATE �`� CONTRACT NO. DATE OF TRIP TEST. 3/A' INSPECTOR 1 J�fAR7rfi( DAY WORK NO. — NOTE: BEFORE ANY DRY PIPE VALVE IS TRIP TESTED, THE WATER SUPPLY LINE TO IT SHOULD BE THOROUGHLY FLUSH D. THE TWO INCH GRAIN BELOW THE VALVE SHOULD BE OPENED WIDE, AND WATER AT FULL PRESSURE SHOULD BE DISCHARGED LONG ENOUGH TO CLEAR THE PIPE OF ANY ACCUMULATION OF SCALE OR FOREIGN MATERIAL. IF THERE IS A HYDRANT ON THE SUPPLY LINE, THIS HYDRANT SHOULD BE FLUSHE BEFORE THE TWO INCH DRAIN IS OPENED. THE DRIP- VALVE ON THE DRY PIPE VALVE SHOULDBE CHECKED BEFORE TRIPPING THE DRY PIPE VALVE, TO SEE THAT IT IS IN OPERATING CONDITION. DRY PIPE VALVES SYSTEM NO. (/ I ) SYSTEM NO. ( JI ) SYSTEM NO. ( ) SYSTEM NO. ( ) VALVE SERIAL NUMBER MANUFACTURER (NAME) E VALVE MODEL VALVE SIZE LAINCH ,'J',- INCH INCH INCH CONTROLLWG SPRINKLERS (LOCATION) (NUMBER) (APPROXI (APPROXI (APPROX) (APPROX) DATE LAST TRIP TESTED? fir N DATE LAST OPERATED? pil (A PRESSURE BEFORE TEST AIR LOa LES Los Les WATER ta0 LEs 66LES LES LOS SIZE AND LOCATION OF TEST VALVE WAS GATE VALVE BELOW DRY WIDE AT TEST? OF NOT MOW VALVE OPEN MANY TURNST) O Re On - YEN VALVE TRIPPED AT AIR PRESSURE LOS i LOS LOS LES WATER PRESSURE LEa LES LOS SEs TIME MIN SEC IF EM FLOODED. LIST TIME WATER REA-.,EO TEST OPENING MIN SEC MIN SEC MIN SEC k/1N s SEC MIN SEG MIN SEC MIN SEC PERFORMANCE INTERIOR OF BODY G D MOVING PARTS VALVE CONDITION RUBBER FACING SEATS RESET? DIO ALARMS OPERATE AT TRIP TEST? ALL LOW POINT DRAINS BLOWN OUT/ WATER CONTROL VALVE LEFT OPEN ANO SEALED? -41 ALARM C N ROL VALVE LEFT OPEN AND SEALED? QUICK OPENING DEVICES SYSTEM NO. SYSTEM NO. rSYSTEM NO. ( ) SYSTEM NO. ( ) DEVICE SERIAL NUMBER MANUFACTURER (NAME) TYPE AND MODEL AIR PRESSURE IN UPPER CHAMBER LEs LOS LOS LE! QUICK OPENING DEVICE TRIPPED AT C LOS ago/Ea Si•C LOS SEC LEa PERFORMANCE QUICK OPENING DEVICE LEFT IN SERVICE AND CONTROL OPEN AND SEALED? LIST ANY UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS: RE. AS: Range Hood Systems Report SERVICE �1�.�N -i? �6L '+w�ti i• W C208'887- 1280 O In CUSTO p Address 3 3 �� '✓��" (� city �I ' 1 i A.k) Telephone Store No. Owner or Manager ♦/n / rPT rn �ll-LJr DATE OF SE VICE TIME A.M. P.M 2. Duct and plenum covered wJcorrect nozzles 0 21. Check travel of cable nuts/S-hooks ANNUAL SEMI- NUAL I RECHARGE I INSTALLATION RENOVATION LOCA)�gF SYSTEM CYLINDERS Z d'fltJ , M UFACTURER MODEL NUMBER j1/ET DRV CHEMICAL �,2Fx. � P V, 25. CYLINDER SIZE MASTER CYLINDER SIZE SLAVE CYLINDER SIZE SLAVE 31,G Gam. 375G>�u 8. Pressure gauge in proper range (If gauged) FUSE LINKS 360' F. FUSE LINKS 450' F FUSE LINKs 500' F OTHER 13 28. 29. FUELJ FF ELECTRt Y GAS SIZE �// 11 1. - 5 systems 11. 6 year maintenance date SERIAL NUMBER LAST HYDRO TEST DATE LAST RECHARGE DATE 12. Inspect cylinder and mount Q-1 Q� MANUFACTURER'S MANUAL REFERENCE PAGE NUMBER: DRAWING NUMBER: 11k.A11111Yt7 P7r rL1/71YVL LVv/-. / /-1- RkJUZ ' i b0 - lL Lr Ste\ UA T -- 2. Duct and plenum covered wJcorrect nozzles 0 21. Check travel of cable nuts/S-hooks 1. All appliances properly covered w/correct nozzles � 20. Replaced fuse links 2. Duct and plenum covered wJcorrect nozzles 0 21. Check travel of cable nuts/S-hooks -3. Check positioning of all nozzles. 22. Piping & conduit securely bracketed between fryers & flame 4. System installed in accordance w/MFG UL listing 23. Proper separation 5. Hood/duct penetrations sealed w/weld or UL device 24. Proper clearance -flame to filters ? - 6. Check if seals intact, evidence of tampering i 25. Exhaust fan in operating order 7. If system has been discharged, report same CX_ 26. All filters replaced C OK 8. Pressure gauge in proper range (If gauged) 27. Fuel shut off in on position 9. Check cartridge weight (If applicable) 28. 29. Manual & remote set/seals in place 011(__ Replace covers 10. Hydrostatic test date systems 11. 6 year maintenance date 30. System operational & seals in place _t 12. Inspect cylinder and mount 31. Slave system operational 13. Operate system from terminal link 32. Clean cylinder & mount 14. Test for proper operation from remote C2L 33. Fan warning sign on hood 15. Check operation of micro switch_ 34. Personnel instructed in manual operation of system 16. Check operation of gas valve f 35. Proper hand portable extinguishers 0K, 17. Clean nozzles _Q- 36. Portable extinguishers properly serviced O 18. Proper nozzle covers in place 37. Service & Certification tag on system 19. Check fuse links and clean_ NOTE DISCREPANICES OR DEFICIENCIES BELOW COMMENTS: S rrv� Sfi�( A5 LAL 3��U zGz� i2`; r►1��-r�s rq N� X1/1 A lV V� P�:j S '6 a C i� [ C EM c?rl? S On this date, the above system was tested and inspected in accordance with procedures ofth pr sently adopted editions f �.., NFP 17, 17A, 96 a d the manufacturer's manual and was perated according to these pr cedu s with results indic 'te above. S_EWVI ECHNICIAN~ PERMIT NO. 6 DATE: TIME: AM The above service technician certifies that the system was personally inspected and I CUSTOMER COPY as indicated on thin repo) B. Brody Equip"w Company. I CONTRACTOR'S MATERIAL & TESTCERTIFICATE FOR U NDERGROUND PIPING PROCEDURE Upon oonhplstlon d w«k f epealon and tsahs ah.11 a nhede by tthe o amracnh representsM and wlehsssed by an ownses npwsaesalM. All ddeets shah a oonecysd arW system Ash h aerhAw beton oaaranors sipnwsys Is�ay. A o dative dW a tiled out and signed byboth daim apskrt cootarcr for faulty pmste�rW. Poorkw er « approving au#wrWs oepAranwss « local UpkhalhaeMtho way PraIW anY IaW ardihathoes. PROPERLY NAME OATS ME-621�! 7 GIG—ti /a rz G�< s,� 3—/41 g `7 PROPERTYADDRESS ' �T M = . oiki,3 1 95B(10416) PRINTED INLISA Figure 8-1(b). 1991 Edtkm (OVER) ACCEPTED BY APPROVING AUTHORITIES (NAMES) ADDRESS PLANS Tac, t---, F -- INSTALLATION CONFORMS TO ACCEPTED PLANS O YES O NO EQUIPMENT USED IS APPROVEO O YES ONO IF NO. STATE DEVIATIONS WAS PERSON IN CHARGE OF FIRE EOUIPMENT BEEN INSTRUCTED AS TO LOCATION O YES O NO OF CONTROL VALVES AND CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS NEW EQUIPMENT? IF NO. EXPLAIN 'NST RucTIONS HAVE COPIES OF APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTIONS AND CARE AND MAINTENANCE CHARTS O YES O NO BEEN LEFT ON PREMISES? IF NO. EXPLAIN SUPPLIES BUILDINGS LOCATION PIPE TYPES AND CLASS TYPE JOINT G PIPE CONFORMS TO STANDARD O YES O NO UNDERGROUND FR'f INCaS CONFORM TO Z4 STANDARD DYES O NO PIPES IF NO. EXPLAIN AND JOINTS JOINTS NEEDING ANCHORAGE CLAMPED. STRAPPED. OR BLOCKED IN DYES O NO ACCORDANCE WITH �ac�A' �-{' STANDARD IF NO. EXPLAIN FL I SHM Flow 1M rapuisd two led waw is dear as kdicaaad by no collection of foreign material in burlap baps a[ outlets wch as hydrants and blow-olk. Flash at flows not kiss Unn 390 GPM (1476 Linn) for 44nch Pipe. 090 GPM (3331 Linin) for 6-ihoh pipe. ISM GPM (5905 Umin) for 8 - Inch pips. 2440 GPM (9235 L nk) for 10-ihdh pipe. and 3520 GPM (13323 Urtin) for 124nch pips. When soppy cannot Woduos stipulated flow rates. obtain rtuxinam available. HYDROSTATIC. Hydrostatic legs chat be made at not fess than 200 psi (13.6 bans) for two hours or 50 psi (3.4 bans) above static pressure is TEST DESCRIPTION exaea d 150 psi (103 bre) for two holm. t FaKaGF New pips Lay wk h rubber Vas Wed )o4ts chap, V dw NoAsrwtsNp 4 satisfactory. have We or no leakage at Ow jolts. TM anlou t of leakage al the joists shat no exceW 2 ass. Per W. (1.69 Uh) Per 100 jolts knespediw d pips diameter. The leakage "a dictrbuted over all )pmts. I such leakage 000m of a low joins the kMallalion slid be conski ed unsalifactory and necessary rapaiks made. Ths anaunt d allowable leakage spedfwd above may be Increased by 10 oz per in. valve dhwmw Par tea. (30 KAS mnVh) for each nWal salted vale isolating the feet .*tion. It dry barrel hyWarts we Issisd with Iw man vats open, w dw ttydrats aro under preamme. are additional 5 oz par nikaM (150 ntJmiM leakage Is permuted for each hydrant. I NEW UNDERGROUND PIPING FLUS44ED ACCORDING TO A1t--Pfl' 7ZJ STANDARD O YES O NO BY (COMPANY) 1F NO. EXPLAIN HPW FLUSHING FLOW WAS OBTAINED THROUGH WHAT TYPE OPENING W_KIBUIC WATER O TANK OR RESERVOIR O F11RE PUMP O HYDRANT BUTT. O OPEN PIPE RAN' LEARNS FLUSHED ACCORDING TO STANDARD O YES O NO TESTS BY (COMPANY) IF NO. EXPLAIN HUSHING FLOW WAS 08TANED THROUGH WHAT TYPE OPENING C WATER O TAMC OR RESERVOIR O FIRE PUMP O Y CONN. TO FLANGE i SPIGOT O OPEN PIPE 95B(10416) PRINTED INLISA Figure 8-1(b). 1991 Edtkm (OVER) W GRINNELL • GRUVLOK FIG. 7000 COUPLING The Fig. 7000 Coupling is designed for applications requiring moderate internal pressures. The Fig. 7000 Coupling is approxi- mately 30% lighter in weight than the Fig. 7001 Coupling, and allows for working pressure ratings up to 600 psi (41.4 bar). Fig. 7400 ooe<< ,.,Rigidlite The Fig. 7400 Rigidlite Coupling from Gruvlok is specially designed to provide a rigid, locked -in pipe connec- tion to meet the specific demands of rigid design and fire protection sys- tems. Fast and easy swing -over installation of the rugged lightweight housing produces a secure, rigid pipe Joint. The Fig. 7400 Rigidlite Coupling is UL/ULC Listed and FM Approved for 175 psi (12.1 bar) fire protection ser- vice in both wet and dry systems with roll grooved or cut grooved steel pipe prepared in accordance with Gruvlok grooving specifications. The Figure 7400 Rigidlite Coupling is available with the EPDM "C" -style gasket or the Flush Gap"m gasket. The Fig. 7400 Rigidlite Coupling is intended for use in fire protection sys- tems with a maximum ambient tem- perature of 150°F and installed in accordance with NFPA Standard 13 "Sprinkler Systems". Figure 7000 / 7000S Coupling Nominal Pipe Max. Wk. Max. End Range of Pipe End Deflections from q Coupling Dimensions - Coupling Bolts Nominal Size 0. D. Pressure Load Separation Per PipeX Y Z Size Approx. Wt. Ea. Inches Inches Inches PSI Lbs. Inches Coupling in./ft. Oty. Inches Lbs. DN/mm mm bar kN mm Degrees mm/meter mm mm kg 1 1.315 600 815 0-1/8 5°-26' 1.14 23/8 41/4 1314 2 3/ax21/4 1.3 25 33.7 41.4 3.69 0-3.2 1.2 95.1 60 108 45 0-3.2 M10x57 0.6 11/4 1.660 600 1,299 0-1/8 4°-19' 0.91 23/4 43/8 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.4 32 42.4 41.4 5,84 0-3.2 1.70 75.5 70 111 45 M1067 0.6 11/2 1.900 600 1,701 01/a 3° 46' 0.79 3 4518 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.5 40 48.3 41.4 7,58 0-3.2 45 65.8 76 117 45 2.375 M1047 0.7 2 2.375 600 2,658 0-1/a 3°-1' 0.63 31h 51/2 13/4 2 3/6x21/4 2.1 50 60.3 41.4 11.81 0-3.2 21/2 52.7 89 140 45 37/8 M1067 0.9 21h 2.875 600 3,895 0-1/a 2°-29' 0.52 4 5314 13/4 2 %x21/4 2.3 65 73.0 41.4 17,32 0-3.2 0-1/8 43.4 102 146 45 3/8x21/4 M1047 1.1 3OD* 2.996 600 4,230 0-1/8 2°-23' 0.50 4 61/8 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 2.3 65 76.1 41.4 18.82 0-3.2 2 41.6 102 156 45 12.1 M1047 1.1 3 3.500 600 5,773 0-1/8 2°-3 0.43 450 63/4 13/4 2 1/24 2.9 80 88.9 41.4 25.68 0-3.2 114.3 35.8 117 171 45 197 M12x70 1.3 31/2 4.000 600 7,540 0-1/8 1°-48' 0.38 51/8 75/6 13/4 2 1/2x3 3.1 90 101.6 41.4 33,54 0-3.2 171 31.4 130 194 45 2.0 M12x76 1.4 4 4.500 600 9,543 0-1/4 3°-11' 0.67 57/8 81/6 2 2 1/2x3 4.6 100 114.3 41.4 42.45 0-6.4 M12x76 55.6 149 206 51 5,807 M12x76 21 41/4 OD' 4.250 600 8,512 0-1/4 3°-22' 0.70 51/2 73/4 2 2 1/2x3 4.0 100 108.0 41.4 37.90 0-6A 175 58.8 140 197 51 2 M1206 1.8 5 5.563 500 12,148 0-1/4 2°-35' 0.54 7 95/8 2 2 5/801/2 6.1 140 141.3 34.5 54.06 0-6A 45.1 178 244 51 M16x89 2.8 51/4 OD' 5.236 500 10,766 0-1/4 2°44' 0.57 61/2 91/8 2 2 5/8x31/2 5.7 125 133.0 34.5 47,90 0-6.4 47.7 165 232 51 M16x89 2.6 51/20D- 5.500 50o 11,879 0 1/4 2'-36' 0.54 63/4 93/8 2 2 5/8x31/2 6.0 125 139.7 34.5 52.84 0-6.4 45.4 170 238 51 Mt6x89 2.7 6 6.625 500 17,236 0-1/4 2°-10' 0.45 1 8 11 2 2 5/8x31/2 8.1 150 168.3 34.5 76.69 0-6.4 37.8 203 279 51 M16x89 3.7 61/4 OD* 6.259 500 15,384 0-1/4 2°-17' 0.48 71/2 103/a 2 2 5/6-31/2 6.7 150 159.0 34.5 68.45 0-6.4 39.9 191 264 51 M16x89 3.1 61/2OD* 6.500 500 16,592 0-1/4 2°-12' 0.46 73/4 103/4 2 2 %x31/2 7.0 150 165.1 34.5 73.81 0-6.4 38.4 197 273 51 M16x89 3.2 8 8.625 500 29,213 0-1/4 1°-40' 0.35 103/8 131/4 23/8 2 3/4x41/2 14.2 200 219.1 34.5 129,98 0-6.A 29.1 264 337 60 M20x110 6.4 'Couplings designated as the 7000S in these sizes Figure 7400 Rigidlite Coupling 15 Range of Coupling Dimensions Coupling Bolts Nominal Pipe Max. Wk. Max. End Pipe EndApprox. Size O.D. Pressure Load Separation X Y Z Size Wt. Ea. Inches Inches Inches PSI Lbs. Inches Oty. Inches Lbs. mm mm bar kN mm mm mm kg 1 1.315 175 238 0-1/8 21/4 1 41/2 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.2 25 33.7 12.1 1.08 0-3.2 57 114 45 1 M10x57 1 0.5 11/4 1.660 175 379 0-1/8 2% 43/4 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.3 32 42.4 12.1 1.70 0-3.2 67 121 45 M10x57 0.6 11/2 1.900 175 406 0-1/8 27/a 47/8 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.4 40 48.3 12.1 2.21 0-3.2 73 124 45 M10x57 0.7 2 2.375 175 775 0-1/8 31/4 51/2 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.6 50 60.3 12.1 3.45 0-3.2 83 140 45 M10x57 0.8 21/2 2.875 175 1,136 0-1/8 37/8 6 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.9 65 73.0 12.1 5.05 0-3.2 98 152 45 M1047 0.9 3 O 2.996 175 1,234 0-1/8 4 57/8 13/4 2 3/8x21/4 1.9 65 76.1 12.1 5.49 0-3.2 102 149 45 WNW 0.9 3 3.500 175 1,684 0-1/8 41/2 63/4 13/4 2 3/8x23/4 2.1 80 88.9 12.1 7.49 0-3.2 114 171 45 M10x70 1.0 4 4.500 175 2,783 0-1/4 55/6 73/4 17/8 2 3/8x23/4 3.1 100 114.3 12.1 12.38 0-6.4 143 197 48 M10x70 1.4 51/2 OD 5.500 175 4,158 0-1/4 63/4 91/4 2 2 1/24 4.5 125 139.7 12.1 18.50 0-6.4 171 235 51 M12x76 2.0 5 5.562 175 4252 0-1/4 67/a 91/4 2 2 1/2x3 4.6 140 141.3 12.1 18.92 0-6.4 175 235 51 M12x76 2.0 61/2 OD 6.500 175 5,807 0-1/4 73/4 103/8 2 2 1/2x3 5.5 150 1 165.1 12.1 25.83 0-6.4 197 264 51 M12x76 2.5 6 6.1525 175 6,033 0-1/4 77/8 103/6 2 2 1/2x3 5.5 150 168.3 12.1 26.8, 0-6.4 200 264 51 M12x76 2.5 15 /01**- I W N N W W I�----- J f- 0 z M7 :D V Ix W z 0 0 z 0 0 W cox 976 Vol. 1 Fig. 7 FEB 11 1990 0 _z C z CU a' -- x r �� �- x n� �c x 4 ru)" �n LO x M x ;j x M x n CN x to x n x 17m Ni. x CN x x x� x x x x x x TI-1wi-19-11-9-rit,cncn sa x x x aux u7 x x x xr'i N x x � n to x x�scMs,� scT ��� ^, V T�2 0 � Z ZR 4. i � h .Z' < t O W WW L Q W (n t 2 F- -J - 3 0 x La c -1 LL. C CEx q76 Vol. 1 QlitFigs 8 FEB 11 1990 • W aa�� N N x� x wxco x x to x x � x u`C x G x � � tt� ca "C co tD } • C Q IUICuIr cD (C (D cp ca ca (D (O ca (D (O ca 1 C x C NLO x to x xx x x tO 1 M x •C x `C tt tD t0 ca x x x F N , x rC x x x to tD to .�. �(D t0 �- x x a. ax x x^C`C x x xCN N x x x �r xl x C c 1 r 4 r� � tncn 7111 --Q .c c c f W xx x Ln N x x xr x x U2 CC-4xx x x �K x x N x nt7 c C14 Nom+') x i viii . MIA —ILq Lill, SII a Q CEX 97b Vol. i Fig. � . FEB 11 1990 V) W W i— W a WLL.N `, t O 2 C) aLd �- LL. N x N (n x N W W 1- N l I 1 N Allied Light Wall pipe is a quality domestic manufactured product with exceptional physical characteristics and advantageous hydraulic design capabilities. Ideally suited for use in any sprinkler system installation, Allied light wall pipe is a proven Performer that complies with the exacting standards of ASTM -A135. Lightweight but strong and durable, the precision -engineered Allied light wall pipe allows for ease of handling to facilitate installation, at significantly reduced labor costs. Complies with ASTM -A135 standards Allied light wall pipe meets the Precise requirements of ASTM -A135 governing tensile and yield properties, toler- ances, material composition, etc., as well as Allied's own exacting standards of consistency and quality. Reduced weight with increased strength Allied's unique in-line cold forming process produces a work hardened light wall pipe with exceptional tensile strength. Allied light wall pipe averages 30% greater tensile strength than the minimum requirements of ASTM -A135 (grade A) and is resistant to permanent deflection. In addition, the superior quality steel used in the manufacture of Allied's light wall pipe meets the ASTM -A568 requirements for carbon and high strength, low alloy steel. Ease of handling for cost efficiency The lighter weight of Allied light wall pipe assures easier handling, resulting in reduced installation costs and considerable freight savings. Flexible design for maximum engineering capabilities Allied light wall pipe's larger inside diameter provides increased water flow and volume, which can reduce Pipe sizes required for many installations. Cut -to -length Pipe availability also assures greater system flexibility, since systems can be engineered minus the installation restraints imposed by standard pipe lengths. For further flexibility, Allied light wall pipe is specially designed for use with either plain -end or grooved mechanical fittings. Trade size ODNominal IU wall lrrc Nominal Weight Bundle sizes PCs. per Bdk. 1" 1.315 1.097 .109 1.40 91 1'/4" 1.660 1.442 .109 1.81 61 1'/2" 1.900 1.682 .109 2.08 61 2" 2.375 2.157 .109 2.64 37 21/2" 2.875 2.635 .120 3.53 30 3" 3.500 3.260 .120 4.33 19 3'/2" 4.000 3.760 .120 4.97 19 4" 4.500 4.260 .120 5.61 19 5" 5.563 5.295 .134 7.77 7 6" 6.625 6.357 28 7 8" 8.625 8.249 111]694 7 Allied TUBE & CONDUIT 16100 South Lathrop Avenue Harvey, Illinois 60426 (708) 339-1610 1-8000 8AALLLIED A GH1111bell COMPANY SALES OFFICES AND WAREHOUSES United States ARIZONA Ph- 85017 -3131 WW Thenar A& -1604 272-6535 CALV:ORN1A Ei Cajon 90020 - 795 CrpB Wy -16,9) M7-6001 FuaM d 92631- 601 Sao, P V fty - Ave. 773-1166 llrywad W545 4-4 Asa. Wry -14151867 -WW (M6) "1.69M S LGRAb 95814 - 431 IBd,ntla BMS -(9161 "1-6901 COLORADO 004 BMW -2175 F9MaNh SL -(303)1125-7161 FLORIDA Tamp 33619 -1440 MaaaaO OW -18,316214761 GEORGIA ABMaa 30318 -645 NWhsift Ot, NW - 14 0415246 2 01 HAWAII 1 98819-900 MW -W- 839-2792 HMW 60426 -15100 SoW Ha4Md SL - (3121847-1500 INDIANA kWWW01s 46226 - 8615 EM 33rd SL - (3171895-2424 LOWSIANA JGFa 70121- 300 J44bsor, Hwy, S -IM 1100 -15041 837.0362 MARYLAND M�ASSACHU"-TS S0' "bn^gMa PkisY-130,1381-9100 C 02021 -120 Shw.naA Rd - ism 62866W Mabe ICHIGAN Taybr 48180 - 2855 TrOMY kldeM p, _ (3131292-3800 MINNESOTA Sba'I^9bn 55431 -1201 W 961h SI. - (612) 684.7131 MISSOURI 5L Louis 63110 -1615 SdJh KkgsNghway - (31 N. Kansas City 64116 -1930 Warran - (8161 474 41 41 7 771 7t4925 versatile Allied light wall pipe has been tested and qualifies for use in automatic sprinkler systems, meeting the requirements of NFPA 13, 13D and 13R. Allied light wall pipe is available in the following sizes: Trade sizes 1" thru 4" in lengths 211 & 251 Trade sizes 5" thru 8' in lengths 211 only Specifications, descriptions, services and illustrative material herein are accurate as known at time of publication and are subject to change without notice, NEW JERSEY (MNro NYC Arae) L W Y Pak 0]035 - sa BMw Brook 816 - IM9q 696-0600 NEW YORK R.'r 14607- 1346 Llr4vara4y Asa -m6)442-7940 NORTH CAROLINA Chabft 28208 -1431 VAM Mw* W SL -rAKI 3764431 0Hlo CbckaMi 45237 -1025 L"m Ase. - (5131242-0440 CbvSWW "103 -1294-96 EM 5% SL -12M 431-4311 OKLAHOMA TWga 74145 - 4119 Sash Ton E" Asa -198) anWW OREGON Pwtl 97210-3204 Nwbw ,29n AAr.-(5M 2237101 PENNSYLVANIA B.nW- 61020-1411 Ford RL - (21516'846 PdhO�o ISM - /3M RH9a A.a. -14121 32165" TENNEE MMr444a 38112 - 315 CunraWtl SL -(901) 452-386 NaaMBp 37210 - 1317 Ekn 118 PMe -16151244,3613 TEXAS kvkg 75061 - 2423 EM Pura Drive -12111 438-4414 8-4414 Z. - 9989 OM C1kbn PA -(7131675-6371 VIRGINIA NwbM 23504 - 1430 BaMndbe BIW. - (410416276000 R -*m 23231 - 43216"* Rd. -,804J M-8940 WASHINGTON Kere 98032 - 0212 So. 00ug S1. -12061251-9595 Long -90632 -915 O0lglas -12061425-4944 WISCONSIN Milwaukee 53233 - 1819 West S. Pa Ave. -14141937-9000 Canada � SNO 306 St, SE BW 3 -(403) 279-9451 1134012091 SL - (4031 452-9641 BRn18M COLUUMA NMrb,O V913Y4- 2560 K-11, Rd - (604) 756.1551 Rldelottl VBV /V7 - MW VM V Wry -1604) 273-K41 MANITOBA Wk R3HOV2- 777 Carry St -(2041774,3461 NOVA SCOTIA eMBnaAh 838 /P5 -20 VMko p. -(MQ) 486-9721 ONUM SW" ONA LINE 2" -+70 SaanMn 9L -1411, M-9230 7aa1e0 682 2C5 -10 NOT131Man $ - (4M 2514171 SMnia N7T 286 -211 C4rr,. &- (5191 M6.7690 275 &KU" PSE SPS -,K48y Lair RW - (705)"-9600 QUEBEC MOnk"HIP 1k! -3980J M11kbn St. VAM-1514>0=11k 0 14e lX-1308154355.98 9aaloaM, -87K SB6 - 6034]n 5404041 E -130612.. IVGrinnell SUPPLY SALES COMPANY Technical SuppaVMaAreting/Design Services 1341 Elm apeA Avenue Cranston. RI 02910 (4011941 -SOW GdnneB Corporation. Exe uj a office 3 Tvco Park Allied Schedule 40 pipe is exceptional domestic quality Pipe specifically designed and manufactured for installation in today's advanced -technology sprinkler systems. Like all of our quality sprinkler pipe and components, Allied Schedule 40 Pipe meets or exceeds all industry specifications—as well as our own stringent quality control standards. To assure uniform composition and consistent appearance, Allied manufactures its Schedule 40 pipe utilizing an exclusive, innovative Allieed TUBE & CONDUIT Process to provide excellent strength. The result is a Precision -engineered Schedule 40 pipe of superior quality. Allied Schedule 40 Pipe (meets all ASTM -A135 standards Allied Schedule 40 pipe has been thoroughly tested, and Possesses certifiable mechanical properties that comply with the exacting standards of ASTM -A135, which contains rigid specifications governing tensile properties, material composition, tolerances and Other relevant product qualities. The inhelrem strength of Allied Schedule 40 pipe Allied Schedule 40 pipe is manufactured from high quality steel and is work hardened through a special cold forming process for exceptional strength and SCHEDULE 40 PIPE AVAILABLE IN TRADE SIZES 1" THRU 2" IN LENGTHS OF 21' AND 25' 16100 South Lathrop Avenue Harvey, Illinois 60426 (708) 339-1610 1-800-8ALLIED .moi+ A ����][�11�j5 VI["Iu7nC�COMPANY 15M 591 SP PRINTEn IN US A Trade oD size 1" 1.315 1%- 1.660 ID V111d Nominal Bundle ThicknenV1119 IrNctReaCs. Per K PBdle. 1.049 1.380 1'/2" 1.900 1 1.610 2" 2.375 1 2.067 SALES OFMES AND WAREHOUSES United States •133 1.68 70 140 2.27 51 .145 2.72 44 754 3.65 30 ARIZONA Ph -65M7-3131 WM Th 11 PA–(0121272-0645 CALIFORNIA 8 Cp192M —195 9 -Ole WOY P1kca0- Av0.——101019760ITN 01 Fu"M `M-011 Sp01 7761101 Saw 9151514 Alps W-y—Ntsl W74MW %814 — 43, RFL-lOs M-2 _ (918111t69M Da 99202 — 2175 PN4saI SL —(3031825-7101 FLORIDA *aro- 33019— Wo Mew -a Nka _ (8131 OZ4791 GEORGIA Afb 30316-915 NNtl ift jk_NW–H81153462M HAMA( I-LN�GI 9"—� MSM-19081SM-2n2 HmW W429 —15100 Seal, 119h1M SL — (312) 847-1500 INDIANA LORJSL728 18-915 EM 3319 SL -13171 895-24 24 3 -Ha -on 7M21— 300 J-Bnypn µvy_ Sy6-1910 —15041 8374387 MARYLAND Cdwnb"WMSV" 9 a�d8gy­Pk-Y—(3M1381A100 Cron02621-120 51rwI-A ft — (617) 9786650 MWANGAN %Y 48180 _ 21655 71o14y kx%u W Dr. – (3131292-3800 MINNESOTA _ 810m bn55131-1201 W 98W SL –1612189.1-7131 MISSOURI SLL-u483110-1615 SouW rY—(0141 n149i25 N Kap-4 C67-%-1930:2 —101194746500 durability. Precision - engineering produces a Schedule 40 product with an exceptionally low variation in .N outside diameter and wall thickness. Rigid quality control inspection during the manufacturing Process helps to assure that Allied pipe will have consistent properties and uniform composition for easier threading and longer threading tool life. The end result is a long-lasting, highly adaptable Schedule 40 pipe exhibiting excellent strength characteristics. Specifications, descriptions, services and illustrative material herein are accurate as known at time of publication and are Subject to change without notice: NEW JERS 01!( n NYC Ana) NEW V Pat07095-89 Ba6W Brook 01—(101)8960601 NEW YORK 884 AN. – (71914ce-7010 ARDLINA ChrMr 28208 –1401 Wta MN-Iatl SL – (7019376+131 OHIO C41 01101_1625 LWWa ASL -45131242 -OW oNaANROMA 121401 EM SMSL—PW4MJ311 VAN 74US-4119 So1017011 F" Awa. —(Me) 8924M OREGON PEorWd_$7210– Na91 2901AW' (5M223-7101 844446 79020—NII N91d 191 _ (2151636%00 —191TENNESSEE 2332165" M"VN136,12 —M5 W-h-ryl6 9L —(6 011 4 52-31x6 IIMIrae 37216— 7317 E11I w 014 — (6151 701 6 813 TEXAS � 75661— z428 For Piuler Ortw —12TH138-4411 Haa4n 77001 — 8994 OM ck�-o- ru _ m31 els-6371 wRGlan Na14k $1501— 1430 B-bl4ris BIM. — (011) 6276890 AS"I01GTON —1329 Euhalk R4. — (6041222.6610 WASHINGTON Kell 96032 — 6212 Sa 198W SL — (20 61 251-95 9 5 LOrpriew 98832 — 915 Owg4e — 0081425-1944 WISCONSIN M*m*se 53233 — IM W" St. Pa Ale. — (41419376000 Canada CO9ay TAC IK9-594630W I-%-! 3—NMg2769154 OO IAMA 7701x—N8314526en PL4-na1NV01I1V7 ffi89 ��—X1759-ISSt 3900 V6M1IpWI1V—(HON 2739211 MAWFOSA Y-19 SC "M OM2— 1x0 mC—"SL-41774,UM NOVA SCOTIA D& W 4101998 tP5 — W MOb @ — K0214690121 ONUM zc�a 2w—gos.rlrl aL-1461 e64e2ao saw 19772011 — 2" Con0a SL— OM 33&TMo71 5ft— W5"La. %W -1/0 51 671 -em SA "'*W HV ,7W6 T-FelSL, NW—IHR' y SKAR49k1- S4P 3W7 — 216 Mi St — (3OB) 543 -SM S-4t41o0n — 87K SB6 — 5034M 9k -M E-13081: n Grinnell" _ = SUPPLY SALES COMPANY 13411 EknW000Av61 -VIDesign vices Cr atony RI 02910 (401)941-8000 Grinnell C-p_a1i3n, Eeecutive 0(j6 4 Fr — r - QUALITY THREADABLE LIGHTWALL SPRINKLER PIPE' The Most Technologically Advanced Type of Sprinkler Pioe. Allied XL Pipe is a time nested threadable light wall sprinkler pipe manufactured in through Tisizes and engineered to provide the bast in low cost sprinkler protection. Allied XL pipe is suitable for use in accordance with NFPA 13,13D and 13R, and it can be used either threaded or unthreaded in wet, dry, preaction or deluge systems having working pressures of 300 P.S.I. or less. Allied XL Pipe offers superior features to conventional Schedule 40 Physical features and Cost and characteristics: time savings: • Superior hydraulics • Used with standard • Lower sprinkler • No special processes • Galvanized exterior couplings, fittings and system casts or thread sealants • Greater yield strength valvas • Freight savings required for installation High strength • ended paint • •Standard N.P. T. • Exceptionally high finishes Cc costs ng equipment burst strength applied to Allied XL • Reduced waste • Light weight Pipe Allied XL Pipe successfully met or exceeded all the U.L. requirements and was the first sprinkler pipe to receive unrestricted Underwriters Labora- torkm Inc. listing for approved fire systems having working pres- sures of 300 P.S.I. or less. Tests performed by Underwriters Lab Flexural test: Simulating loading of typical pipe and hanger installations. One inch and larger sizes were tested simulating sprinkler branch lines described in NFPA 13. Hydrostatic leakage & assembly test: Leakage and hydrostatic tests on both contractor threaded pipe and U.L. threaded pipe, gauged and found to conform with ANSI/ASME 81.20.1-1983. Fire test: Simulating wet, deluge and dry pipe fire exposures. Burst test: Hydrostatic burst tests on threaded and unthreaded pipe. Vibration test: Exposure of Allied XL Pipe to vibration in order to simulate seismic conditions. Test Factory Multua by Allied XL Pipe per ASTM A135 evaluations: • Chemical analysis • Tensile strength • Flattenability • Hydrostatic performance • Quality of welded seams Allied TUBE & CONDUIT • Variations in weight or dimensions • Workmanship • Finish • Marking Joint evaluation tests: • Threaded per manufac- turer's recommendation • Threaded per observed field practices (Both "drop -head" and "adjustable") • Butt welds • Flexible pipe couplings on roll -groove -ended pipe • Plain -end fittings (Locking set -screw engaging pipe to a predetermined dimension) • Plain -end fittings (Locking set -screw engaging pipe to a predetermined torque value) Hydrostatic tests per ASTM A135 on: • Threaded assemblies • Welded assemblies Hydrostatic tests performed at 4 times the pressure ratings: • Plain -end fittings • Roll -groove fittings Bending moment tests: • Samples were internally pressurized to their rated working pressure Vibration tests: • Threaded joints • Plain -end fittings (Locking set -screws engaging Pipe to a pre- determined dimension) • Plain -end fittings (Locking set -screws engaging pipe to a predetermined torque value) Cycling pressure tests: Three similar assemblies were cycle pressure tested 20,000 times from 0-125 P.S.I. 16100 South Lathrop Avenue Harvey, Illinois 60426 (312) 339-1610 1-80,0,-8A�LLIIED A Grinnell COMPANY 15M 5/91SP PRINTED IN U.S.A. Thread strength tests: • Allied XL Pipe behaves similarly to ASTM A53 material • Allied XL Pipe has a much higher yield strength than Schedule 40 of greater wall thickness • Threads are easily cut on Allied XL Pipe No leaking, loosening, weakening or other evidence of failure was detected in any of the above testing proce- dures. Tested against conventional SK40 product Comparative tests summary - Allied XL Pipe vs. Schedule 40 Construction and Instal- lation: U.L stated Allied XL Pipe is suitable for fabrication of sprinkler systems. Materials: Allied XL Pipe has mechanical strength Properties equivalent to or greater than required for Schedule 40. Flexural: Allied XL Pipe Passed Schedule 40 flexure test requirements without leakage. Hydrostatic: Assembled Allied XL Pipe, threaded in accordance with ANSI/ASME 61.20.1-1983 can withstand internal pressure without leaks in the same manner as Schedule 40. Vibration: Allied XL Pipe did not leak at or below 600 P.S.I., twice its normal working pres- sure, and did not exhibit any signs of weakness, deteriora- tion or wear at the threads. SALES OFFICES AND WAREHOUSES urdw stafea AMONA PhMM195017-MM Val Thw R4-f602)2M-0535 EI C9p192020 - 791 CrMe vA7 - I61q 017-8001 wrap 90-801SMPlkc-W M417,3.1166 S --d ft 95 14 Alpw MYV - IL 017-8700 8 1p 95011-131 RIrJ1k1M SNd.-MM441-OW COLORADO M11Mr 8@@ -2175 FbMh SL - (303) 525.7181 PLONDA IMW 9-,1p MMM10 BNd. - (M316214761 A9 -Y 3MM - 615 N -ft dk 01, MY - "I 521-6201 KWIRA uLN s11��18-830MW Pe 58011 -RM, 839-2792 D425 -10100 SM 1l~ SL _13121617-1500 DIAM 46M - 6815 EM lid SL - (M7) M5 -21N J861-7121_300 Ja%s ", Sit 1100-(501)a37-0382 MARYLAND slowdan Riar Pkwy -13 011 39" -MOO 0 MASSACIKISETTS C- 02021 _120 Sh- Rd - P17) a28 -6M LRCHGAR 9,a IMM _ 21M5 Lo1sy kMuw* or. - M31292aW NNOM SODL SWMiq 554M-1201 W 9 SL -(612)8847131 MISSOUN SL Law 63110- tats SM Ic geNplw-,• _ (31,) rn�925 N.N-W GIy 81116-1930=0 -(016)171-0500 JER>iEr (a.uo Mrc An.) ticoM P-kNEW YORK %PLCA9rM R3--R0,1Ma-0MD Am*"W $OR-130UM-My Aw.-n1R"2-70p NORM CAROLSNA Ch -1M 28x09 -14M YAM VAW1 dSL-X1=4431 ONTO Ckax1M 46237-1925 LaWhw Aa - (5142424W CIMWM"183-12M-NEMI859151.-X131.1311 olaAW" Abe 74M -4118 aM 7891 EMI A• - 0" 622188D OREGON P-U1M 97218 - 3240 Nor9ww112891 Aa - Pq 223-7101 PENNSYLwJDI ==- -.r-a No2D -1H, wrd ILL - 51936M00 -,32119d,k Aa -T14 121321!5" M111pNk 30112 - AMM 315 c1.1e.1.IM a -19.1) 4s2atM TEN 372p -/3A Ea 191Pr-101512"�9M3 kwp 75001 -ala F• -PI -111r Od,9-r2M)13a�/11 ,awa1770M - Mea OM c9+m Ra - m316753971 VMI bike3o15aE1er91-80z6627-am 2M- Fki-pD4) WAS TON KM 99832 -9212 S• tM SL -x0112514015 .. L-9-96632 - MS D-yIM -(20M 1273-pµ Miw- _53239-,M9 W" SL hW Aa-Hig9-mm Fire resistance: The me- chanical and bending strength of Allied XL Pipe provides equivalent resistance to the stresses imposed by fire. Burst test: Allied XL Pipe - tested to 9,000 P.S.I. Corrosion resistance: Based on the examination of Sched- ule 40 pipe specimens, the Battelle Columbus Laboratories has estimated that Allied XL Pipe would last up to and exceeding 100 years in most automatic sprinkler systems. It is expected that particularly corrosive condi- tions will result in a shorter service life, as it will for Schedule 40••. 'Factory Mutual Approved for we. sprinkler systems in 1' thru 3• sizes. "Details available in February 21, 1984 report by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. "'ULC - Details available in January 10, 1990 report by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada ULC approved for wet systems in threaded application. ULC approved for wet-dry-preaction and deluge systems in unthreaded application. Specifications, descriptions, services and illustrative material herein are accurate as known at time of publication and are subject to change without notice. Canada CM,My TIC 17(8-S ecoall 11M 1 1280 11h .S18-1Y0"3 452-e279-9151 14119i1q V9T 3Y1-2480 KMwd91 Rd - (BDI) 75&1551 RWTOM V8V M _ 3100 V•Yq Y4y-1014) 213.9211 MANR0871 wk -440 RM OW - 771 CM*" SL -(W41774-3461 NOVA SCOTIA D"Mulh ME IPS -2O WAD Or.-R02148"M, ONTANO biorb=LO 2"-1709.01•^t-H,B)5M.rn1 Suft N7r 208- t1N-91QRM 81-N33&1-1171 Sud"y ME 5P5--12105 LAW 36.7MO ot1ESEC ,•Iy I.W ROtl-(75167,-9800 mewlµ 3180 JMn 9x1 S1. W"-(5,11342-2100 R49i- S4P 91Y7 -286 019 SL -(9pR 819-5535 SWMm1- S7K 505- SOl17M 8YM E -13081 n� Grinnell `J,r SUPPLY SALES . ,.COMPANY TecMacal-%")0rt/MKI0My70Bsign sery 1341 Ekllwood Avenue Crar>Nat. R102910 (401) 941-8000 Grimell Corporation, Executive Offices 3 Tyco Park Exeler, NH 03833 —16031778-9200 ?_1 HOR. SIDEWALL & RECESSED HOR. SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS UNIVERSAL MODEL A/0-71 STANDARD GENERAL DESCRIPTION The 1/2 inch (15 mm) orifice, 5 mm bulb, Universal Model A/0-71 Horizon- tal Sidewall and Recessed Horizontal Sprinklers (Ref. Figure A) are auto- matic sprinklers of the frangible bulb type. They are "standard response - standard orifice sidewall sprinklers" in- tended for use in fire sprinkler systems designed in accordance with the stan- dard installation rules recognized by the applicable Listing or Approval agency (e.g., UL Listing is based on NFPA 13 requirements). Horizontal sidewall sprinklers are gen- erally used in lieu of pendent and up- right sprinklers because of building construction or installation economy considerations. They are designed for installation along a wall or the side of a beam and just beneath a smooth ceiling. Installed with their centerline of waterway horizontal, these sprinklers produce a quarter -spherical water dis- charge pattern that is predominately directed downward and outward from the deflector; however, a portion of the spray is also directed towards the backwall. The Model A/0-71 Sprinklers feature a unique "Deflector Hat" which provides a low profile for improved aesthetics. The recessed versions of the Model A/0-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers are obtained by utilizing the Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon (Ref. Fig- ures A and C). The F700 Recessed Escutcheon provides 1/2 inch (12,7 mm) of recessed adjustment or up to 3/4 inch (19,1 mm) of adjustment from the flush sidewall position. The F700 has a separable two-piece design which allows installation of the sprinklers and pressure testing of the fire protection system, prior to wall construction and/or application of a fin- ish coat to the wall. They also permit refinishing of a wall surface without having to first shut down the fire pro- tecton system and remove the sprink- lers. The adjustment provided by the F700 substantially reduces the accuracy to which the length of fixed pipe nipples to the sprinklers must be cut. Also, the Printed in U.S.A. 5-96 5 mm BULB 1-13/16" (46,Omm) 1/2" (15 mm) ORIFICE, 1/2" NPT** DEFLECTOR HAT — } / )_6* 9/16" (14,3mm) 1 - Frame 2 -Button WRENCH 3 - Gasketed Spring Plate 4 - Bulb 5 - Compression Screw 6 - Deflector 2-7/8" DIA. (73,Omm) CENTERLINE OF WATERWAY 7/16" 0 1, 1 mm) MAKE -IN — 1 /2" NPT WRENCH FLAT MODEL F' RECESSED ESCUTCHE 1-1/2" (38,1 mm) 2-3/16" (55, 7mm) Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to orifice seat on frame. Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on special request. FIGURE A 1/2 INCH ORIFICE MODEL A/0-71 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS AND RECESSED HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS TD535M NOTES: 1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Light or Ordinary Hazard Occupancies. 2. Listed by Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada for use in Light or Ordinary Hazard Occupancies. 3. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use in Light Hazard Occupancies. 4. Approved by the Loss Prevention Council (United Kingdom). 5. Approved by the Scientific Services Laboratory (Australia). 5. Accepted by the City of New York under MEA 241-94-E. 7. UL and ULC Listings, as well as FM, SSL, and NYC Approvals, are based on a deflector -to -ceiling distance of 4 to 12 inches (100 to 300 mm), whereas LPC Approval is based on 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm). The top of the Deflector Hat, to which these dimen- sions apply, is 9/16 inch (14,3 mm) above the centerline of waterway (Ref. Figure A). B. Listings and approvals are based on an installation with the 1/2" (15 mm) Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon. Closure has a 1/2 (12,7 mm) wide flange which provides ample clear- ance for covering the mounting hole. Laboratory listings and approvals for the 1/2 inch (15 mm) orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers and Recessed Horizontal Sprinklers are given in Table A. WARNING The 112 inch orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers and Recessed Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers described herein must be installed and maintained in compli- ance with this document, as well as applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addi- tion to the standards of any other au- thorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. The installing contractor or manufacturer should be contacted rel- ative to any questions. Installation of Model A/Q-71 Hori- zontal Sidewall Sprinklers in re- cessed escutcheons other than the TABLE A LABORATORY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS F700 will void all sprinkler warran- ties, as well as possibly void the sprinkler's Approvals and/or List- ings. IOTd The 1/2 inch (15 mm) orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall and Re- cessed Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 175 psi (12,1 bar). They are to be installed in accordance with the deflector -to -ceiling distance speci- fications indicated in Table A, and the standard installation rules recognized by the applicable Listing or Approval agency. The sprinklers are available in the temperature ratings and finishes indicated in Table A. Recessed versions of the Model A/Q-71 Sprinkler are obtained by utiliz- ing the Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Side- wall Sprinkler in combination with the Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon. The F700 Escutcheons are available with a chrome plated finish or a color coated finish in any color. The nominal discharge curve plotted in Figure B represents the flow "Q" in GPM (LPM) as determined by the fol- lowing formula: Q = Wp_ -2- DISCHARGE IN U.S. GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM) 10 is 20 25 30 35 1 45 6 S U 40 3 W cc 35 0 ix m 30 UJ G 25 Z) O = 20 W is ca W a 10 50 75 100 125 150 DISCHARGE IN LITRES PER MINUTE FIGURE B NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURVE 3,0 2.s c m 2,0 W 1,5 IL 1,0 o.s where the nominal discharge coeffi- cient "K" equals 5.6 (80,7); and, "p" equals the residual flowing pressure in psi (bar). Listing standards permit the actual value of "K" to vary from 5.3 to 5.8 (76,4 to 83,6); however, for hydrau- lic calculations, a K -factor of 5.6 (80,7) is to be applied. The Frame of the Model A/Q-71 Sprinkler (Ref. Figure A), is bronze per ASTM B176 (C87800) or, a proprietary SPRINKLER FINISH TYPE TEMPERATURE RATING BULB LIQUID COLOR NATURAL BRASS I CHROME PLATED I POLYESTER COATED All Colors HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL (See Note 7) 135'F/57'C Orange 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 155'F/68'C Red 175'F/79'C Yellow 200*F/9TC Green 286'F/141'C Blue 360'F/182'C Mauve 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 RECESSED HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL (See Notes 7 & 8) 135'F/57'C Orange 1, 2, 5, 6 155'F/68'C Red 175'Fl79'C Yellow 200'F/93'C Green NOTES: 1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Light or Ordinary Hazard Occupancies. 2. Listed by Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada for use in Light or Ordinary Hazard Occupancies. 3. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use in Light Hazard Occupancies. 4. Approved by the Loss Prevention Council (United Kingdom). 5. Approved by the Scientific Services Laboratory (Australia). 5. Accepted by the City of New York under MEA 241-94-E. 7. UL and ULC Listings, as well as FM, SSL, and NYC Approvals, are based on a deflector -to -ceiling distance of 4 to 12 inches (100 to 300 mm), whereas LPC Approval is based on 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm). The top of the Deflector Hat, to which these dimen- sions apply, is 9/16 inch (14,3 mm) above the centerline of waterway (Ref. Figure A). B. Listings and approvals are based on an installation with the 1/2" (15 mm) Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon. Closure has a 1/2 (12,7 mm) wide flange which provides ample clear- ance for covering the mounting hole. Laboratory listings and approvals for the 1/2 inch (15 mm) orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers and Recessed Horizontal Sprinklers are given in Table A. WARNING The 112 inch orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers and Recessed Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers described herein must be installed and maintained in compli- ance with this document, as well as applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addi- tion to the standards of any other au- thorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. The installing contractor or manufacturer should be contacted rel- ative to any questions. Installation of Model A/Q-71 Hori- zontal Sidewall Sprinklers in re- cessed escutcheons other than the TABLE A LABORATORY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS F700 will void all sprinkler warran- ties, as well as possibly void the sprinkler's Approvals and/or List- ings. IOTd The 1/2 inch (15 mm) orifice Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall and Re- cessed Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 175 psi (12,1 bar). They are to be installed in accordance with the deflector -to -ceiling distance speci- fications indicated in Table A, and the standard installation rules recognized by the applicable Listing or Approval agency. The sprinklers are available in the temperature ratings and finishes indicated in Table A. Recessed versions of the Model A/Q-71 Sprinkler are obtained by utiliz- ing the Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Side- wall Sprinkler in combination with the Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon. The F700 Escutcheons are available with a chrome plated finish or a color coated finish in any color. The nominal discharge curve plotted in Figure B represents the flow "Q" in GPM (LPM) as determined by the fol- lowing formula: Q = Wp_ -2- DISCHARGE IN U.S. GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM) 10 is 20 25 30 35 1 45 6 S U 40 3 W cc 35 0 ix m 30 UJ G 25 Z) O = 20 W is ca W a 10 50 75 100 125 150 DISCHARGE IN LITRES PER MINUTE FIGURE B NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURVE 3,0 2.s c m 2,0 W 1,5 IL 1,0 o.s where the nominal discharge coeffi- cient "K" equals 5.6 (80,7); and, "p" equals the residual flowing pressure in psi (bar). Listing standards permit the actual value of "K" to vary from 5.3 to 5.8 (76,4 to 83,6); however, for hydrau- lic calculations, a K -factor of 5.6 (80,7) is to be applied. The Frame of the Model A/Q-71 Sprinkler (Ref. Figure A), is bronze per ASTM B176 (C87800) or, a proprietary ,n FULLY RECESSED DIMENSIONSt Up to 1/2 inch adjustment from minimum 1/4 inch to maximum 3/4 inch recessed position. Dim. Inches mm A- 5/8±1/8tt 15,9±3,2 &Min. 3/4 19,1 B -Nom. 1 25,4 B -Max. 1-1/4 31,8 C -Min. 1/4 6,4 C -Max. 3/4 19,1 HIGH ADJUSTMENT DIMENSIONS Up to 3/4 inch adjustment from the flush sidewall position to 3/4 inch recessed position. Dim. Inches mm A- 1/2±1/4tt 12,7±6,4 B -Min. 3/4 19,1 B -Nom. 1-1/8 28,6 B -Max. 1-1/2 38,1 C -Min. FLUSH — C -Max. 3/4 19,1 ko,1 MMI t For best overall appearance. tt Remaining 1/4 inch (6,4 mm) of adjustment can be used to compensate for variations in sprinkler make -in and fitting take-out. 1- Model A/0-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler 2- Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon a- Mounting Plate b- Closure FIGURE C MODEL A/0-71 RECESSED HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER WITH TWO-PIECE MODEL F700 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON alloy designated as QM. The Button (bulb retainer) is phospher bronze per ASTM B103 (C51000 or C52100). The Gasketed Spring Plate consists of a Berylium Nickel (N03360) disc spring that is sealed on both its inside and outside faces with a Teflont gasket. The Compression Screw is bronze per ASTM 8140 (C31400), and the Deflec- tor is phospher bronze (C51800). These Model A Sprinklers utilize a 5 mm diameter frangible bulb. Table A indicates the bulb liquid color as a function of temperature rating. The F700 Recessed Escutcheon pro- vided for use with the Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler (Ref. Figure C) has a Closure and Mounting Plate fabricated from low carbon steel. The Mounting Plate prongs, which are compressed back into the Mounting Plate as the Closure is pushed over it, maintain a tight friction fit between the two pieces. The Mounting Plate and Closure can also swivel relative to each other and compensate for minor non -perpendicularity between the Model A Sprinkler and the wall. ILLATIC r� Do not install any bulb type sprinkler if the bulb is cracked or there is a loss of liquid from the bulb. With the sprinkler held horizontal, a small air bubble should be present. The diame- ter of the air bubble is approximately 1116 inch (1,6 mm) for the 135 F/57"C to 3/32 inch (2,4 mm) for the 360 F/182"C rating. (At higher ambient temperatures, the bubble may be barely perceptable for the lower temperature ratings.) Installation of Model A/Q-71 Hori- zontal Sidewall Sprinklers in re- cessed escutcheons other than the F700 will void all sprinkler warran- ties, as well as possibly void the sprinkler's Approvals and/or List- ings. The Model A/Q-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers must be installed in accor- dance with the following instructions. 1. Prior to installing the sprinklers and if applicable, verify that the face of the sprinkler fitting is within the proper range of distance which can -3- SPRINKLER SPIRIT FITTING LEVEL + - CENTERLINE 6"(150mm) OR OF WATERWAY LONGER NIPPLE DEFLECTOR + - — VP FIGURE D LEVELING OF SPRINKLER FITTING AND DEFLECTOR be accommodated by the type of escutcheon being used. When installing a Model A/Q-71 Hor- izontal Sidewall Sprinkler with the F700 Recessed Escutcheon, for best overall appearance, use Di- mension A indicated under the "Fully Recessed Dimensions" heading of Figure C. Otherwise, use Dimension A under the "High Adjustment Di- mensions" amensions" heading. In either case, t DuPont Registered Trademark SELECTION: USE: Select the appropriate wrench When using an 8 or 10 inch adjustable Crescent based on the following re- quirements: type wrench, the wrench is to be applied to the sprinkler wrench flats only (Ref. Figure A). A. Model A/Q-71 Sprinklers To use the F850 Sprinkler Wrench, slip the with a natural brass or Wrench opening over the Model A/0-71 Sprink- chrome plated finish and ler Deflector by passing the Sprinkler Wrench up where the Wrench Flats (as from beneath the sprinkler as shown in the ad - shown in Figure A) are ac- jacent illustration. cessible, may be installed with an 8 or 10 inch adjust- Using a 1/2 inch ratchet drive or by applying an able Crescent type wrench 8 or 10 inch adjustable wrench to the hex end of or the Model F850 Sprinkler the Sprinkler Wrench, tighten the sprinkler into Wrench. the fitting. The two lugs located on opposite sides of the Wrench indicate the orientation of B. Model A/Q-71 Sprinklers the sprinkler frame arms. with a polyester coated fin- ish must only be installed NOTE with the Model F850 Push on the Sprinkler Wrench, while it is being Sprinkler Wrench. turned, to ensure that the Wrench recess stays fully engaged with the sprinkler wrench flats. C. Model A/Q-71 Recessed Sprinklers which are to be Carefully remove the Sprinkler Wrench by dis- installed after completion of engaging it from the sprinkler wrench flats, and the wall must be installed then lowering it down over the sprinkler deflec- with the Model F850 tor. Sprinkler Wrench. FIGURE E SPRINKLER WRENCH SELECTION AND USE the remaining escutcheon plate ad- justment can then be used to com- pensate for the possible manufac- turing variations in the take-out of the fittings, as well as in the make -in of the sprinklers (as permitted by ANSI B1.20.1). 2. The Model A/ -Q-71 Horizontal Side- wall Sprinklers must be installed with the centerline of waterway horizon- tal and perpendicular to a backwall surface, and the deflector -to -ceiling distance is to be 4 to 12 inches (100 to 300 mm). It is recommended that a lightweight spirit level (less than 1 pound), be used to level the sprinkler fitting, as shown in Figure D and that a square be used to check perpendicularity of the waterway centerline to the mounting surface. 3. After installing the F700 Mounting Plate (or other escutcheon, as appli- cable), over the sprinkler threads, apply pipe thread sealant sparingly to the sprinkler threads only. Use of a Teflont based pipe thread sealant is recommended. Hand tighten the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting. 5. Refer to Figure E and select the appropriate Sprinkler Wrench for tightening the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting. The word "TOP" on the Deflector must face upwards to- wards the ceiling. The F850 Sprinkler Wrench must be used for installing polyester coated sprinklers, in order to prevent dam- age to the sprinkler finish. NOTES A leak tight 112 inch NPT sprink- ler joint should be obtained with a torque of 7 to 14 ft. lbs. (9,5 to 19,0 Nm). A maximum of 21 ft. lbs. (28,5 Nm) of torque is to be used to install the sprinkler. Higher levels of torque may distort the sprinkler inlet with consequent leakage or impairment of the sprinkler. Do not attempt to make-up for in- sufficient adjustment in the es- cutcheon plate by under- or over - tightening the sprinkler. Readjust the position of the sprinkler fitting to suit. It is recommended that a spirit level be used to level the sprinkler Deflec- tor, as shown in Figure D. 6. In recessed horizontal sidewall sprinkler installations, after the wall has ben installed or the finish coat has been applied, slide on the F700 Closure over the Model A Sprinkler and push the closure over the Mounting Plate until its flange comes in contact with the wall. -4- Model F850 Nylon Coated Sprinkler Wrench Automatic sprinklers must never be shipped or stored where their temper- atures will exceed 100'F/38'C and they must never be painted, plated, coated or otherwise altered after leav- ing the factory. Modified sprinklers must be replaced. Sprinklers that have been exposed to corrosive products of combustion, but have not operated, should be replaced if they cannot be completely cleaned by wiping the sprinkler with a cloth or by brushing it with a soft bristle brush. Care must be exercised to avoid dam- age to the sprinklers — both before and after installation. Sprinklers dam- aged by dropping, striking, wrench twist/slippage, or the like, must be re- placed. Also, replace any sprinkler that has a cracked bulb or that has lost liquid from its bulb (ref. Installation Section Note). NOTES Absence of an escutcheon, which is used to cover a clearance hole, may delay the time to sprinkler operation in a fire situation. Before closing a fire protection system control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system which it con- trols, permission to shut down the af- fected fire protection system must be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be notified. .,-IN It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected quar- terly by a qualified Inspection Service. Inot Seller warrants for a period of one year from the date of shipment (warranty period) that the products furnished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. For further details on Warranty, see Price List. ORDERING PROCEDURE A Product Symbol Number (PSN) is not specified when ordering polyester coated Model A/Q-71 Sprinklers with other than a white color; when ordering color coated Model F700 Recessed Escutcheons with other than a white color; or when ordering sprinklers with thread connections per ISO 7/1. It is suggested that a color chip be pro- vided when ordering special color fin- ishes. Otherwise, responsibility for du- plication cannot be accepted. Contact your local distributor for avail- ability. Sprinkler Assemblies: Specify: 1/2" orifice, (specify tempera- ture rating), Model A/Q-71 Standard Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprink- ler with (specify type of finish), PSN (specify from Table B). "Special Order" Sprinkler Assemblies with ISO 7/1 Thread Connections: Specify: 1/2" orifice, (specify tempera- ture rating), Model A/Q-71 Standard Response Horizontal Sidewall Sprink- ler with (specify type of finish) and with thread connection per ISO 7/1. Recessed Escutcheon: Specify: 1/2" (15 mm) Model F700 Re- cessed Escutcheon with (specify fin- ish), PSN (specify). 1/2" (15 mm) F700 Chrome Plated ......... PSN 56-701-9-010 1/2" (15 mm) F700 White Color Coated ................ PSN 56-701-41010 Sprinkler Wrench: Specify: Model F850 Sprinkler Wrench, PSN 56-850-4-001. PSN 57 - XXX - X - XXX TEMPERATURE TYPE SR 578 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER FINISH 1 NATURAL BRASS 4 WHITE POLYESTER 9 CHROME PLATED 135 155 175 200 286 360 RATING 135'F/57'C 155'F/68'C 175'F/79'C 200'F/93'C 286'F/141 -C 360'F/182'C TABLE B PRODUCT SYMBOL NUMBER SELECTION 1/2 INCH ORIFICE MODEL A/0-71 STANDARD RESPONSE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS The nominal weights are as follows. 1/2" Orifice Model A/0-71 Horizontal Sidewall Sprinkler ................ 2.3 ozs. (66 9) 1/2" Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon ..... 1.2 ozs. (35 g) Model F850 Sprinkler Wrench ......... 15.5 ozs. (440 g) Patents are pending with regard to de- sign features of the Model A/Q-71 Standard Response Horizontal Side- wall and Recessed Horizontal Sprink- lers. -5- PENDENT, RECESSED PENDENT, AND UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS UNIVERSAL MODEL A STANDARD RESPONSE, 5mm BULB TYPE, 1/2" (15mm) ORIFICE, 1/2" NPT** SSU DEFLEOTOR* ESCUTCHEON PLATE SEATING SURFACE WRENCti FLAT 2-3/16" ( 55,6 mm 2- 3/16" MODEL 1 /2" (55,6mm) 1-1/2" RECESSED NPT (38,1mm) RECESSED ** ESCUTCHEON SSP DEFLECTOR* 2-7/8" (73,Omm) DIA. 17/16"(1i,imm) MAKE -IN PENDENT RECESSED PENDENT UPRIGHT 1 - Frame 3 - Gasketed 4 - Bulb 6 - Deflector 2 - Button Spring 5 - Compression Plate Screw Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to orifice seat on frame. ' * Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on special request. CROSS SECTION FIGURE A 1/2 INCH ORIFICE MODEL A PENDENT, RECESSED PENDENT, AND UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS GENERAL DESCRIPTION The 1/2 inch (15mm) orifice Universal Model A Pendent, Recessed Pendent, and Upright Sprinklers (Ref. Figure A) are automatic sprinklers of the frangi- ble bulb type. They are "standard re- sponse - standard orifice spray sprink- lers" intended for use in fire sprinkler systems designed in accordance with the standard installation rules recog- nized by the applicable Listing or Ap- proval agency(e.g., UL Listing is based on NFPA 13 requirements). The Pendent, Recessed Pendent, and Up- right Sprinklers all produce a hemi- spherical water distribution pattern below the deflector. The recessed versions of the Model A Sprinkler are obtained by utilizing the Model A Pendent Sprinkler in combi- nation with the Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon (Ref. Figures A and C). The F700 Recessed Escutcheon pro- vides 1/2 inch (12,7mm) of recessed adjustment or up to 3/4 inch (19,1 mm) of adjustment from the flush pendent position. The F700 has a separable two-piece design which allows installation of the sprinklers and pressure testing of the fire protection system, prior to ceiling construction and/or application of a fin- ish coat to the ceiling. They also permit refinishing of a ceiling surface without having to first shut down the fire pro- tection system and remove the sprink- lers. The adjustment provided by the F700 substantially reduces the accuracy to which the length of fixed pipe drops to the sprinklers must be cut. Also, the Closure has a 1/2 inch (12,7mm) wide flange which provides ample clear- ance for covering the mounting hole. %PPROVALS AND STANDARn Laboratory listings and approvals for the 1/2 inch (15mm) orifice Model A Pendent, Recessed Pendent, and Up- right Sprinklers are given in Table A. WARNING The 112 inch orifice Model A Pendent, Recessed Pendent, and Upright Sprinklers described herein must be installed and maintained in compli- ance with this document, as well as applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addi- tion to the standards of any other au- thorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. The installing contractor or manufacturer should be contacted rel- ative to any questions. Installation of Model A Pendent Sprinklers in recessed escutcheons other than the F700 will void all sprinkler warranties, as well as possi- bly void the sprinkler's Approvals and /or Listings. T The 1/2 inch (15mm) orifice Model A Pendent, Recessed Pendent, and Up- right Sprinklers are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 175 psi (12,1 bar) and they are available in the Printed in U.S.A. 4-94 TD516M FULLY RECESSED DIMENSIONSt Up to 1/2 inch adjustment from minimum 1/4 inch to maximum 3/4 inch recessed position. Dim. Inches MM A- 5/8±1/8tt 15,9±3,2 B -Min. 3/4 19,1 B -Nom. 1 25,4 B -Max. 1-1/4 31,8 C -Min. 1/4 6,4 C -Max. 3/4 19,1 HIGH ADJUSTMENT DIMENSIONS Up to 3/4 inch adjustment from the flush ceiling position to 3/4 Inch recessed position. Dim. Inches MM A- 1/2±1/4ff 12,7±6,4 B -Min. 3/4 19,1 B -Nom. 1-1/8 28,6 B -Max. 1-1/2 38,1 C -Min. FLUSH — C -Max. 3/4 19,1 i -- Sprinkler with the F700 Recessed Escutcheon, for best overall appear- ance, use Dimension "A" indicated under the "Fully Recessed Dimen- sions" heading of Figure C. Other- wise, use Dimension "A" under the "High Adjustment Dimensions" heading. In either case, the remain- ing adjustment can be used to com- pensate for the possible manufac- turing variations in take-out of the fittting, as well as in the make -in of the sprinklers' (as permitted by ANSI B1.20.1). 2. After installing the F700 Mounting Plate (or other escutcheon, as appli- cable) over the sprinkler threads, apply pipe thread sealant sparingly to the sprinkler threads only. Use of a Teflont based pipe thread sealant is recommended. 3. Hand tighten the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting. 4. Refer to Figure D and select the appropriate Sprinkler Wrench for tightening the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting. The F850 Sprinkler Wrench must be used for installing polyester coated sprinklers, in order to prevent dam- age to the sprinkler finish. NOTES A leak tight 112 inch NPT sprink- f For best overall appearance. tt Remaining 1/4 inch (6,4mm) of 1- Model A Pendent Sprinkler adjustment can be used to compensate 2- Model F700 Recessed Escutcheon for variations in sprinkler make -in and a- Mounting Plate fitting take-out. b- Closure FIGURE C MODEL A RECESSED PENDENT SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY WITH TWO-PIECE MODEL F700 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON ler joint should be obtained with a torque of 7 to 14 ft. lbs. (9,5 to 19,0 Nm). A maximum of 21 ft. lbs. (28,5 Nm) of torque is to be used to install the sprinklers. Higher lev- els of torque may distort the sprinkler inlet with consequent leakage or impairment of the sprinkler. Do not attempt to make-up for in- sufficient adjustment in the es- cutcheon plate by under- or over - tightening the sprinkler. Readjust the position of the sprinkler fitting to suit. 5. In recessed pendent sprinkler instal- lations, after the ceiling has been installed or the finish coat has been applied, slide on the F700 Closure over the Model A Sprinkler and push the Closure over the Mounting Plate until its flange comes in contact with the ceiling. Automatic sprinklers must never be shipped or stored where their temper- atures will exceed 100'F/38'C and they must never be painted, plated, coated or otherwise altered after leav- ing the factory. Modified sprinklers must be replaced. Sprinklers that have been exposed to corrosive products of combustion, but have not operated, should be replaced if they cannot be completely cleaned by wiping the sprinkler with a cloth or by brushing it with a soft bristle brush. Care must be exercised to avoid dam- age to the sprinklers — both before and after installation. Sprinklers dam- aged by dropping, striking, wrench twist/slippage, or the like, must be re- placed. Also, replace any sprinkler that has a cracked bulb or that has lost liquid from its bulb (ref. Installation Section Note). NOTES Absence of an escutcheon, which is used to cover a clearance hole, may delay the time to sprinkler operation in a fire situation. Before closing afire protection system control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system which it con- trols, permission to shut down the af- fected fire protection system must be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be notified. It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected quar- terly by a qualified Inspection Service. CHECK VALVES — 2" 50mm throw h 12" 300mm GRUVLOK® SERIES 7800FP GROOVED END — 250 PSI (17,2 bar) :)ESCRIPTIr BU HIN PIN RonY FIGURE A SERIES 7800FP GROOVED END CHECK VALVES 4 Inch (100mm) Size Shown The 2 inch (50mm) through 12 inch (300mm), Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves (Ref. Figure A) are designed for use in grooved end pipe fire protection systems and related equipment, where it is necessary to permit flow in one direction and to shut off flow in the reverse direction. They have cut groove inlet and outlet con- nections which are suitable for use with grooved end size pipe couplings that are listed or approved for fire pro- tection system service. The 7800FP Check Valves may be in- stalled either vertically upward or hor- izontally and they are suitable for use in applications such as • fire department pumper connections ^ to sprinkler systems, fire pump discharge and by-pass connections, • connections from public water sup - Printed in U.S.A. 4-93 plies to automatic sprinkler systems, and • gravity and pressure tank connec- tions. The 7800FP Check Valves have a rub- ber faced, swing type clapper design which provides leak tight sealing of back pressures greater than 1 psi (0,07 bar). 4PPROVALS AND STANDARC The 2 inch (50mm) through 12 inch (300mm) Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves are listed by Underwrit- ers Laboratories Inc. and Under- writers' Laboratories of Canada. The Valves are approved by Factory Mu- tual Research Corporation as single check valves and as anti- water -ham- mer check valves. They are also ap- proved by the New York City Board of Standards and Appeals under Calen- dar Number 236 -79 -SA. JtAI KING LAPPER SSEMBLY SIN VNECTIONS WARNING The Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves described herein must be installed and maintained in com- pliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addition to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integ- rity of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. The installing contractor or manufacturer should be contacted rel- ative to any questions. The 2 inch (50mm) through 12 inch (300mm) Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 250 psi (17,2 bar). They may be installed ei- ther vertically or horizontally. In the TD313 SPRING FLOW CLAPPER (IN CONTACT WITH CLAPPER) HINGE PIN SPRING 2 inch (50mm) through 3 inch (80mm) Valves HINGE PIN LEFT SPRING FLOW Is, (IN CON' WITH CL 4 inch 000mm) through 8 inch (200mm) Valves vertical direction, the flow direction must be upwards, and in the horizontal direction, the Hinge Pin is to be located on the top as illustrated in Figure B. The Valve dimensions and pipe thread connections are also shown in Figure B. The grooved inlet and outlet connec- tions are cut in accordance with Gruvlok standard cut groove specifica- tions for steel pipe, and they are suit- able for use with grooved end pipe couplings that are listed or approved for fire protection system service. Pipe thread connections are threaded per ANSI Standard 61.20.1. The nominal pressure loss versus flow rate, as well as approximate friction loss expressed in equivalent length of Pipe for each size valve, are given in Figures F-1 and F-2. The Valve components are illustrated in Figure A. The Body is Ductile Iron per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 (UNS F33100), and the year of manufacture is cast on the Body. The Seat Ring, which is press-fit within the Body, is Stainless Steel per ASTM A213 or A312 (Grade TP 304). The Hinge Pin is made from S30200 or S30400 stain- less steel and the Springs shown in Figure C are formed from stainless steel wire per ASTM A313 (S30200). The Hinge Pin is supported by a pair of sintered bronze Bushings per ASTM B438 (Grade 1, Type II) which are press-fit into the valve Body on either side of the Clapper Assembly. The Bushings ensure low rotational friction and ease of Hinge Pin removal. The Clapper Assembly for 2 inch (50mm) through 5 inch (125mm) size valves is illustrated in Figure D and consists of a Clapper which is fabri- cated from S30200 or S30400 stain- less steel, an EPDM rubber Clapper C F, FIGURE C, SPRING DETAILS APPFR FIGURE D CLAPPER ASSEMBLY 2 inch (50mm) through 5 inch (125mm) Valves NG %INER Facing, a S30200 or S30400 stainless steel Facing Retainer, and a Type 18-8 stainless steel Locknut. The Clapper Assembly for 6 inch (150mm) through 12 inch (300mm) size valves is illustrated in Figure E. They consist of a Ductile Iron Clapper per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 (UNS F33100). A pair of Bushings identical to the ones in the Valve Body are press-fit into the Clapper arms. The Clapper Facing is EPDM rubber, the Spacer isType 18-8 stainless steel, the Facing Retainer is S30200 or S30400 stainless steel, and the Self-locking 3 10 inch (250mm) and 12 inch (300mm) Valves BUSHINGS FIGURE E CLAPPER ASSEMBLY 6 inch (150mm) through 12 inch (300mm) Valves Cap Screw is Type 18-8 or 316 stain- less steel. WARRANTY Seller warrants for a period of one year from the date of shipment (warranty period) that the products furnished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. For further details on Warranty, see Price List. ORDERING PROCEDURE■ Orders for valves, and replacement parts must include the description and Product Symbol Number (PSN). Valves: Specify: (specify [as applicable] ANSI nominal pipe size in inches or pipe O.D. in millimetres) Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valve, PSN (specify from Table A). PSN 59 -516 -1 -XXX TABLE A PRODUCT SYMBOL NUMBER SELECTION FOR VALVE ASSEMBLIES Replacement Valve Parts: Specify: (specify description) for use with (specify size [inch or DN millimetre]) Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves, PSN (specify). 2"(50mm) VALVES Clapper .................. PSN 92-516-1-201 VALVE PIPE SIZE INCHES MILLIMETRES ANSI DN PIPE O.D. 010 2 50 60,3 011 2-1/2 65 73,0 100 — 65 76,1 012 3 80 88,9 013 4 100 114,3 014 5 125 141,3 101 — 150 165,1 015 6 150 168,3 016 8 200 219,1 017 10 250 273,0 018 12 300 323,9 TABLE A PRODUCT SYMBOL NUMBER SELECTION FOR VALVE ASSEMBLIES Replacement Valve Parts: Specify: (specify description) for use with (specify size [inch or DN millimetre]) Series 7800FP Grooved End Check Valves, PSN (specify). 2"(50mm) VALVES Clapper .................. PSN 92-516-1-201 Clapper Facing ........... PSN 92-516-1-202 Facing Retainer ........... PSN 92-516-1-203 Locknut.................. PSN 92-514-1-420 Hinge Pin ................ PSN 92-516-1-205 Spring ................... PSN 92-516-1-206 Clapper Assembly ........ PSN 92-516-1-207 2-1/2" (65mm) VALVES Clapper .................. PSN 92-516-1-101 Clapper Facing ........... PSN 92-516-1-102 Facing Retainer ........... PSN 92-516-1-103 Locknut.................. PSN 92-514-1-420 Hinge Pin ................ PSN 92-516-1-205 Spring ................... PSN 92-516-1-306 Clapper Assembly ........ PSN 92-516-1-107 3" (80mm) VALVES Clapper .................. PSN 92-516-1-301 Clapper Facing ........... PSN 92-516-1-302 Facing Retainer ........... PSN 92-200-1-205 Locknut .................. PSN 92-514-1-420 Hinge Pin ................ PSN 92-516-1-205 Spring ................... PSN 92-516-1-306 Clapper Assembly ........ PSN 92-516-1-307 4" (100mm) VALVES Clapper..................PSN 92-516-1-401 Clapper Facing ........... PSN 92-514-1-403 Facing Retainer ........... PSN 92-514-1-405 Locknut.................. PSN 92-514-1-420 Hinge Pin ................ PSN 92-514-1-414 Spring ................... PSN 92-516-1-406 Clapper Assembly ........ PSN 92-516-1-407 5" (125mm) VALVES Clapper .................. PSN 92-516-1-501 Clapper Facing ........... PSN 92-516-1-502 Facing Retainer ........... PSN 92-516-1-503 Locknut .................41. PSN 92-514-1-420 Hinge Pin ................PSN 92-516-1-505 Spring ................... PSN 92-516-1-406 Clapper Assembly ........ PSN 92-516-1-507 mwm 6" (150mm) VALVES Clapper w/Bushings ........PSN 92-516-1-610 Clapper Facing ............PSN 92-516-1-602 Facing Retainer ............ PSN 92-516-1-603 Spacer...................PSN 92-516-1-608 Self-locking 92-516-1-608 Cap Screw .............PSN 62-636-1-105 Hinge Pin .................PSN 92-516-1-605 Spring ...................PSN 92-516-1-606 Clapper Assembly .........PSN 92-516-1-607 8" (200mm) VALVES Clapper w/Bushings ........PSN 92-516-1-810 Clapper Facing ............PSN 92-516-1-802 Facing Retainer ............ PSN 92-516-1-803 Spacer...................PSN 92-516-1-608 Self -Locking 92-516-1-608 Cap Screw .............PSN 62-636-1-105 Hinge Pin .................PSN 92-516-1-805 Spring ...................PSN 92-516-1-806 Clapper Assembly .........PSN 92-516-1-807 10" (250mm) VALVES 92-516-1-902 Clapper w/Bushings ........PSN 92-516-1-710 Clapper Facing ............PSN 92-516-1-702 Facing Retainer ............PSN 92-516-1-703 Spacer ...................PSN 92-516-1-608 Self -Locking 92-516-1-905 Cap Screw .............PSN 62-636-1-105 Left Spring ................PSN 92-516-1-705 Hinge Pin .................PSN 92-516-1-704 Right Spring ..............PSN 92-516-1-706 Clapper Assembly ......... PSN 92-516-1-707 12" (300mm) VALVES Clapper w/Bushings ........PSN 92-516-1-910 Clapper Facing ............PSN 92-516-1-902 Facing Retainer ............PSN 92-516-1-903 Spacer...................PSN 92-516-1-608 Self -Locking Cap Screw .............PSN 62-636-1-105 Hinge Pin .................PSN 92-516-1-905 Left Spring ................PSN 92-516-1-904 Right Spring ..............PSN 92-516-1-906 Clapper Assembly .........PSN 92-516-1-907 n 0 Registered trademark of GRINNELL CORPORATION, TYCO PARK, EXETER, NH 03833 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS, 21/2" x 21/2" x 4" MODELS F715 (Straight), F716 (45°), & F717 (90°) With Breakable Caps and Standpipe Identification Cross Section With Swivel Plugs/Chains 1 -Body 5 -Standpipe Iden- 8 -Swivel 10 -Clapper 2 -Clapper tification Plate Gasket Pin 3 -Swivel 6 -Breakable Cap 9 -Swivel 11 -Chain 4 -Swivel 7 -Breakable Cap Retaining 12 -S -Hook Plug Strap Ring 13 -Spiral Ring FIGURE A, TYPICAL MODEL F715 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION ASSEMBLIES GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Models F715 - straight, F716 - 45° and F717 - 90° Fire Department Connections are 2-%- x 2-%" x 4" siamese type connections. They are designed for use as auxiliary water supply connections to automatic sprinkler, water spray deluge, foam - water deluge or standpipe fire protec- tion systems. The Connections provide a means through which fire depart- ments can pump water into a fire protection system, from sources such as hydrants, ponds, and reservoirs. The Connections, which are cast from highly corrosion resistant aluminum alloys, are available in natural, red painted, chrome plated, and bronze anodized finishes. They are also avail- able with Breakable Caps or Swivel Plugs/Chains. The "AUTO SPKR" or "AUTO SPKR/STANDPIPE" identifi- cations are located on the Body. The F715 and F716 are for wall mounting with the F715 generally used for connections eighteen inches to three feet above grade and the F716 is used where it is necessary to locate the connection between three and six Printed in U.S.A. 6-84 feet above grade. The F717 is used for connections to yard valve pits. APPROVALS AND STANDARDS The Models F715, F716 and F717 Fire Department Connections are listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and approved by Factory Mutual Research Corp. The Fire Department Connections are also approved by the New York City Board of Standards and Appeals under Calendar Number 236-79—SA. WARNING The Fire Department Connections de- scribed herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applica- ble standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addition to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of this device. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing his fire protection system and devices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or manufac- turer should be contacted relative to any questions. TECHNICAL DATA The 2-.%" x 2-'/2" x 4" Fire Depart ment Connections are available in three patterns: straight -Model F715, 450 -Model F716, and 900 -Model F717. They are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 175 psi. Typical F715 type assemblies are il- lustrated in Figure A and the nom- inal installation dimensions for each type are indicated in Figure B. The F715, F716, and F717 are single clapper type Siamese Fire Department Connections. The Clapper is free to swing between either inlet hose con- nection, which permits pumping into one or both connections. The connections are available with a variety of finishes, Breakable Caps or Swivel Plugs/Chains, "AUTO SPKR" or "AUTO SPKR/STANDPIPE" iden- tifications, different inlet hose threads, and an optional Escutcheon Plate. The outlet is 4 inch NPT per ANSI Stand- ard B2.1. Breakable cap Connections are only available with natural (aluminum) or red painted finishes. Swivel Plug/Chain TD411 may have been tampered with, then the waterway between the Connection and check valve should also be checked to ensure that it is clear of foreign material. It is recommended that a spare set of Caps and Straps be kept on hand. WARRANTY Seller warrants for a period of one year from the date of shipment (warranty period) that the products furnished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. For further details on Warranty, see Price List. ORDERING PROCEDURE Orders for Connections and replace- ment parts must include the descrip- tion and Product Symbol Number (PSN) where applicable. NOTES Standard Order Fire Department Con- nections have the inlets threaded per NFPA 1963. Unless otherwise spec- ified, Special Order Fire Department Connections are provided with inlets threaded per NFPA 1963. Unless otherwise specified, Standard and Special Order Fire Department Connections are provided without the "STANDPIPE" Identification and Escutcheon Plates. Standard Order F. D. Connections: F715 Natural finish, straight, Model F715L F.O.C. with Breakable Caps ........ . .. , .... PSN 52-715-0-001 Natural Finish, straight, Model F715M F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STAND- PIPE Identification .. PSN 52-715-0-002 Natural finish, straight, Model F715L F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and Escutcheon Plate .......... PSN 52-715-0-005 Red painted, straight, Model F715A F.D.C. with Breakable Caps ......... . , . ...... PSN 52-715-1-001 Red painted, straight, Model F715B F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-715-1-002 Chrome plated, straight, Model F715C F.D.C. with SwivelPlugs/Chains . , , , . , , ... PSN 52-715-9-003 Chrome plated, straight, Model F715D F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification . , , , ...... PSN 52-715-9-004 F716 Red painted, 45° , Model F716A F.D.C. with Breakable Caps . PSN 52-716-1-001 Red painted, 45° , Model F716B F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-716-1-002 Chrome plated, 450, Model F716C F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains.... ... .. .. . , , .... PSN 52-716-9-003 Chrome Plated, 450 Model F716D F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification ... .. PSN 52-716-9-004 F717 Red painted, 90° , Model F717A F.D.C. with Breakable Caps . PSN 52-717-1-001 Red painted, 90° , Model F717B F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-717-1-002 F717 Natural finish, 900 , Model F717L F.D.C. with Breakable Caps .............. PSN 52-717-0-001 Natural finish, 900, Model F717M F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-717-0-002 Bronze anodized, 900 , Model F717E F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains......... . , , ... .. PSN 52-717-5-003 Bronze anodized, 900 , Model F717F F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-717-5-004 Chrome plated, 90° , Model F717C F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains...... ... . , , , .... PSN 52-717-9-003 Special Order Escutcheon Plate: Chrome plated, 90° , Model F717D F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-717-9-004 Standard Order Escutcheon Plates: Natural finish Model F715 Escutcheon Plate ..... .. ... PSN 52-715-0-013 Red painted Model F715 Escutcheon Plate .. ........ PSN 52-715-1-013 Chrome plated Model F715 Escutcheon Plate .. ... ..... PSN 52-715-9-013 Special Order F. D. Connections: Specify: Special order, (specify red painted, natural finish, chrome plated, or bronze anodized), Model (specify number) F.D.C. with (specify Break- able Caps or Swivel Plugs/Chains), and the inlet threaded per (specify NFPA 1963 or names of city and state) specifications, PSN (specify, if ap- plicable). Product symbol numbers have been assigned to the following combinations of "special order" Connections with inlets threaded per NFPA 1963. F715 Bronze anodized, straight, Model F715E F.D.C. with Swivel Plug/Chains . . PSN 52-715-5-003 Bronze anodized, straight, Model F715F F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification . , , ...... PSN 52-715-5-004 F716 Natural finish, 450 , Model F716L F.D.C. with Breakable Caps . ........ .... . ...... PSN 52-716-0-001 Natural finish, 450 , Model F716M F.D.C. with Breakable Caps and STAND- PIPE Identification ........... . . ...... PSN 52-716-0-002 Bronze anodized, 450 , Model F716E F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains.. ......... . ..... PSN 52-716-5-003 Bronze anodized, 450 , Model F716F F.D.C. with Swivel Plugs/Chains and STANDPIPE Identification ..... PSN 52-716-5-004 Special order, bronze anodized, Model F715 Escutcheon Plate ... PSN 52-715-5-013 Standard Order Replacement Parts: Red painted Breakable Cap with Straps for NFPA 1963 thread .. PSN 52-715-1-020 Natural finish Breakable Cap with Straps for NFPA 1963 thread .. PSN 52-715-0-020 Chrome plated Swivel Plug and Chain for NFPA 1963 thread .. PSN 92-715-9-015 Spiral Ring....... PSN 92-784-1-004 Special Order Replacement Parts: Special order, bronze anodized, Swivel Plug/Chain for NFPA 1963 thread ..... . , , , ... PSN 92-715-5-015 Swivel Plug and Chain for inlet threads other than per NFPA 1963. Specify: Special order, (specify chrome plated or bronze anodized), Swivel Plug/Chain for F.D.C. inlet threaded per (specify names of City and State) specifications. Breakable Cap for inlet threads other than per NFPA 1963. Specify: Special order, (specify red painted or natural finish), Breakable Cap for F.D.C. inlet threaded per (specify names of City and State) specifications. CONVERSION FACTORS Parenthetical metric conversions cited here- in are approximate. 1 inch = 25.400 mm 1 pound = 0.454 kilograms WEIGHTS The nominal weights for the Fire De- partment Connections are: Model F715 ............4.7 pounds Model F716 .......... ..6.0 pounds Model F717 .... .. .... .. 6.8 pounds Escutcheon Plate ......... 1.9 pounds n 'e—N, ���EHC���DCI SPECIFICATION SHEET MODEL 850 Materials: Characteristics Ductile iron ASTM A536 Physical Properties: Grade 65-45-12 Size of Mainline 2 1/2", 3, 4", 6", 8", & 10" Max. Working Pressure 175 PSI Hydrostatic Test Press. 350 PSI Temperature Range 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C) End Connections Flanged ANSI B16.1 Trim Class 125 Materials: Main Valve Body Ductile iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 Coating Fusion epoxy coated internal and external AWWA C550-90 Shut Off Valves NRS resilient wedge AWWA C509 gate valves Trim Bronze ASTM B584 Alloy C83600 Elastomer Discs EPDM Spring Stainless steel 15 U.S. Patent No. 4.989 635 MODEL 850 DOUBLE CHECK ASSEMBLY Application Non -Health Hazard Options ❑ UL/FM O.S. & Y RW Gate Valves ❑ Wye - Strainer Agency Compliance 4" & 6" ONLY • ASSE 1015 (horizontal and vertical) • CSA B64.5 . ANSI/AWWA C510-89 •UL ` •FM 8" ONLY • ASSE 1015 (horizontal) Model 850 Flow Curves 2 1/2" & 3" A" R A" I wU 1 buu 2000 GPM Model 850 Vertical Installation 3000 4000 5000 GPM Date 06/94 Drawing SS 850-1 AIR MAINTENANCE DEVICE, AUTOMATIC MODEL F324, PRESSURE REDUCING TYPE GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Model F324 Air Maintenance De- vice (Ref. Figure A), is an automatic, field -adjustable air maintenance device of the pressure reducing type. It is used to control the pressure in a dry pipe sprinkler system or the pilot line system of a dry pilot actuated deluge valve. The Device is utilized in applica- tions where there is a compressed air or nitrogen source which is controlled at a higher pressure than the desired system pressure, such as with *plant air supplies having their own automatic compressor controls, or *nitrogen supplies having single -stage, cylinder mounted pressure regu- lators. APPROVALS AND STANDARDS The Model F324 Air Maintenance De- vice is listed by Underwriters Labora- tories Inc. and Underwriters' Labora- tories of Canada. It is approved by the Factory Mutual Research Corporation. The F324 is approved by the New York City Board of Standards and Appeals under Calendar Number 236- 79— SA. WARNING The Model F324 Air Maintenance De- vice described herein must be in- stalled and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addi- tion to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of this device. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing his fire protection system and devices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or manufac- turer should be contacted relative to any questions. TECHNICAL DATA The F324 Air Maintenance Device is factory assembled and set to auto- matically maintain system pressure at approximately 35 psi. The Device is rated for use with a maximum air (or Printed in U.S.A. 11-85 BY-PASS VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) I/2" NPT OUTLET CONNECTION (TO SYSTEM) RESTRICTOR CHECK VALVE 1 (PRESSURE REGULATOR 1/2" NPT (ADJUSTABLE) INLET CONNECTION STRAINER (FROM COM- PRESSED AIR SUPPLY) �ppd AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) �• FIGURE A MODEL F324 AIR MAINTENANCE DEVICE nitrogen) supply pressure of 200 psi and its outlet pressure may be field adjusted from 5 to 60 psi. Principal components of the F324 are the Pressure Regulator, By-pass Valve, Air Supply Control Valve, Y -Strainer, and Restrictor Check Valve. These components are assembled with Schedule 40 black steel nipples per ASTM A120 and malleable iron pipe fittings per ANSI B16.3. All threaded connections are per ANSI Standard B2.1 and they are assembled using a Teflont based pipe thread sealant. Unions are provided at both the inlet and outlet to ease connection between the air supply and system. The Pressure Regulator is an aluminum bodied unit with a stainless steel spring and Buna-N diaphragm. All internal components are corrosion resistant, and the seals are Buna-N. It has a 1/4. inch Gauge Port which can be used to temporarily connect a pressure gauge and quickly adjust the Device's output pressure (with the control valve in the air supply trim to the system closed). The 1/2 inch By-pass Valve (used for fast filling the system) and the 1/4 inch Air Supply Control Valve are renewable rubber disc sealed, bronze bodied, rising stem valves with fluoro - plastic impregnated packing. The 1/4 inch Strainer has a cast iron body and a 20 mesh stainless steel screen. The Restrictor Check Valve is a Buna-N o -ring sealed, stainless steel spring loaded, brass bodied, 1/4 inch check valve with a 1/8 inch orifice, stainless steel restrictor press-fit into its inlet. TD111 100*11 with Step C. If the required pres- is 35 psi then proceed with Step I. C. Close the control valve in the air OPERATION supply trim to the system. The By-pass Valve in the F324 is opened to fast fill the system during D. Remove the system pressure gauge the initial pressurization. Once the re- from its connection and install it in quired system pressure has been the side gauge port on the Pressure reached, the By-pass Valve is closed Regulator. and the Air Supply Control Valve left open to place the F324 in automatic E. Open the Air Supply Control Valve operation. in the F324. If there is a slight leak in the system, F. Adjust the output pressure of the the Pressure Regulator will automat- Pressure Regulator. Turn the adjust - ically maintain system pressure at the preset level. The 1/8 inch orifice in the ing stem clockwise, as viewed from Restrictor Check limits the flow of air the stem end of the Regulator, to from the Pressure Regulator into the increase pressure and counter -clock - system to a value which is significantly wise to decrease pressure. One-half less than that which will be exhausted turn of the stem will change the by the operation of a 1/2 inch orifice output pressure by approximately sprinkler. 5 psi. G. Close the Air Supply Control Valve INSTALLATION in the F324. NOTE Suitable consideration must be given H. Return the system air pressure to the removal of excessive moisture gauge to its normal location. Re -in - from the compressed air supply. stall the 1/4 inch pipe plug in the gauge port of the Pressure Regula - The F324 Air Maintenance Device tor. Apply pipe thread sealant spar - must be installed in accordance with ingly to the plug threads only. the following criteria: 1. Connections between the air supply I. Open the control valve in the air and the F324 as well as between supply trim to the system. the F324 and the system are to be a minimum of 1/2 inch pipe size. J. Open the Air Supply Control Valve in the F324. 2. A 1/2 inch, non -spring loaded, rub- ber faced, swing type check valve K. Open the By-pass Valve in the (PSN 46-049-1-004 is suitable F324. for the purpose) must be located between the F324 and dry pipe L. Close the By-pass Valve after the sprinkler system piping. A check system has been pressurized to valve of this type is located in the approximately 5 psi less than the air supply trim of the A-2 as well as minimum requirement determined the F302/F3021 Dry Pipe Valves. in Step A. OPERATING PROCEDURE M. After the system pressure has stabil- Place the F324 Air Maintenance De- ized, note the value and compare vice in operation in accordance with with the requirement. Readjust the the following procedure: A. Determine the pressure that meets the minimum requirements of the: *dry pipe valve or dry pilot actua- tor manufacturer, as appropriate, and, • low pressure alarm switch manu- facturer, if applicable. B. If the required pressure is higher or lower than 35 psi then proceed tDuPont Registered Trademark AIR MAINTENANCE DEVICE, MODEL F324 Pressure Regulator, as required, per Steps C thru H. NOTES If the system was over -pressurized during manual fill, a suitable con- nection to the system must be opened and the pressure manually reduced to the desired value. The F324 will then autonomically main- tain the preset system pressure. The Restrictor Check Valve prevents the Pressure Regulator from bleeding down the system. The system pressure should be set at the minimum required value, in order to minimize the time to sys- tem trip in the event of a sprinkler operation. If the Pressure Regulator supplied with the F324 is of the type which has a bleed hole in the side of the body, air may be momentarily exhausted from the bleed hole, after the system pres- sure has stablized. This is a normal operating condition. CARE AND MAINTENANCE The F324 Air Maintenance Device does not require any regularly sched- uled maintenance. It is recommended, however, that its proper operation and condition be periodically verified in accordance with the following de- scribed inspection procedure. Any im- pairment must be immediately cor- rected. It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected by a qualified Inspection Service. NOTE Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for inspection or maintenance work on the fire protec- tion system which it controls, permis- sion to shut down the affected fire protection system must be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be notified. It is recommended that the following F324 inspection procedure be per- formed at least quarterly. 1. Verify that the By-pass Valve is closed. 2. Close the F324 Air Supply Control Valve and clean out the 1/4 inch Strainer located at the inlet to the Restrictor Check Valve. Be sure to replace the strainer basket and tighten the cap securely. 3. Open the F324 Air Supply Control Valve and verify that the control valve in the air supply trim to the system is open. 4. Verify that the system pressure is essentially the same as the previous- ly established requirement. If not, adjust the system pressure as fol- lows: a. Close the system's main control valve and open the main drain valve. Close the Accelerator Con- trol Valve, if applicable. b. Follow Steps C thru J and M in the Operating Procedure Sec- tion. c. Slowly open the Accelerator Control Valve, if applicable. d. Close the main drain valve and then slowly open the main con- trol valve. The F324 Air Main- tenance Device is now ready for service. NOTE After placing a fire protection system in service, notify the proper authorities and advise those responsible for monitoring proprietary and/or central sta- tion alarms. It is also recommended that accumu- lated moisture be removed from air supply moisture filtration equipment, at least quarterly. More frequent in- spections may be necessary in particu- larly humid environments. ,WARRANTY Seller warrants for a period of one year from the date of shipment (war- ranty period) that the products fur- nished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. For further details on Warranty, see Price List. ORDERING PROCEDURE Orders for F324 Air Maintenance De- vices and replacement parts must in- clude the description and Product Symbol Number (PSN). To Order Specify: Model F324 Air Maintenance Device, ........... PSN 52-324-1-002 Replacement Parts: Specify: (specify description) for use with the Model F324 Air Maintenance Device, PSN (specify). Pressure Regulator. .... PSN 92-324-1-007 %:" Globe Valve .... PSN 46-047-1-004 /<" Strainer . .... . PSN 92-322-1-001 M. Restrictor Check Valve . .... PSN 92-326-1-003 /a" Angle Valve .... PSN 46-048-1-002 CONVERSION FACTORS Parenthetical metric conversions cited here- in are approximate. 1 inch = 25.400 mm 1 psi = 6.895 kPa = 0.0689 bar* = 0.0703 kg/cm2" 'Not recognized International System units. WEIGHT The nominal weight of the Model F324 Air Maintenance Device is 6.5 pounds. ® Registered trademark of GRINNELL CORPORATION, 3 TYCO PARK, EXETER, NH 03833 n DRY PIPE VALVES - 4 & 6 INCH MODELS F302 (FLANGED OUTLET) & F3021 (GROOVED OUTLET) GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Model F302 and F3021 Dry Pipe Valves are differential, latch type valves used to control the flow of water to dry pipe sprinkler systems and to provide for actuation of fire alarms when the systems operate. Both model valves are identical except for the discharge connections. The Model F302 Valves have flanged outlet con- nections whereas the Model F3021 Valves have grooved outlet connec- tions. Both model valves are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 175 psi and they are both available in 4 and 6 inch sizes. Basic Trimmings are suitable for use with both the 4 and 6 inch size valves. The trimmings include materials for the alarm test by-pass, priming, prim- ing test, gauge and drain connections, as well as attachment of alarm and supervisory devices, which must be obtained separately. APPROVALS AND STANDARDS Models F302 and F3021 Dry Pipe Valves are listed by Underwriters Lab- oratories Inc. and Underwriters' Lab- oratories of Canada. The valves are approved by Factory Mutual Research Corp., the Fire Offices' Committee and by the New York City Board of Standards and Appeals under Calendar Number 236-79—SA. FOC approval requires that the valve be maintained under a service contract with an FOC accredited agent. WARNING The Models F302 and F3021 Dry Pipe Valves described herein must be in- stalled and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addi- tion to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the integrity of these devices. The owner is responsible for maintain- ing his fire protection system and devices in proper operating condition. The installing contractor or manufac- turer should be contacted relative to any questions. DESIGN (Fig. A) Body Assembly. The Body Assembly consists of the Body (1), Handhole I (MODEL F3020 1 -Valve Body 2—Seat Ring 3—Cotter Pin, 1/8" x 1" (2 req'd) 4—Hex Jam Nut, 5/8"-11 UNC for 4" Valve, %--10 UNC for 6" Valve 5—Clapper Washer 6—Clapper Facing 7—Clapper 8—Lower Latch 9—Washers (4 req'd) 10—Socket Head Shoulder Screw 11—Upper Latch 12—Clapper Nut 13—Upper Latch Pin 14—Clapper Latch 15—Clapper Latch Pin 16—Push Rod Screw 18—Auxiliary Clapper Rod FIGURE A MODEL F302 & F3021 DRY PIPE VALVES Front View 19 -0 -Ring 20—Auxiliary Clapper Seat Ring 21 -0 -Ring 22—Auxiliary Clapper Facing Retainer 23—Auxiliary Clapper Facing 24—Auxiliary Clapper 25—Pipe Plug, 3/8" for 4" Valve (2 req'd), '//" for 6" Valve (2 req'd) 26—Locknut 27—Auxiliary Clapper Spring 28—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover 29—Hex Head Cap Screw, 3/8-16 UNC x 1'/<" (4 req'd) 30—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover Gasket 31—Tube 32—Handhole Cover 33—Handhole Cover Gasket 34.-Spirol Pin 35—Clapper Arm Pin 36—Clapper Arm 37—Pipe Plug, 1/2" 38—Locknut 39—Spirol Pin 40—Hex Head Cap Screw, Y:"-13 UNC x 1'/2" (6 req'd for 4" Valve, 8 req'd for 6" Valve) 41—Cotter Pin, 1/16" x 5/8" (2 req'd) Right View 42—Pipe Plug, '/<" 43—Belleville Spring 50—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber By -Pass Connection, '/1' NPT 51—Alarm Test By - Pass Connection, ''/z" NPT 52—Alarm Connec- tion,'/=" NPT 53—Air Supply Connection, %" NPT 54—Priming Connec- tion,'/:" NPT 55—Main Drain Connection, 2" NPT 56—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Drain, ''/i" NPT 57—Body Drain Con- nection,'/." NPT Cover (32), Auxiliary Clapper Cham- ber Cover (28) and two Gaskets (33, 30). The Body of the Model F302 Valve is cast with integral flanges faced and drilled in compliance with ANSI Stan- dard 816.1. The discharge outlet of the Model F3021 Valve is grooved in compliance with Military Specification MIL—C-10387D. Bodies of both model valves have eight female NPT Connections (50-57) for mounting the valve trimmings and for drains. A Seat Ring (2) for the Clapper As- sembly is permanently mounted in the inlet in the Body and the Auxiliary Clapper Seat Ring (20) is permanently mounted in the left side of the Body. The Handhole Cover and Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover, with their respective Gaskets, are bolted to the Body with Cap Screws (40, 29). Com- munication between the interior of the Body and the Auxiliary Clapper Cham- ber is through a Tube (31) mounted in the upper Left side of the Body. An Identification Label with the year of manufacture is mounted on the face of the Handhole Cover; other markings are cast in raised print on the Cover. The valve serial number and date code are stamped on the front edge of the inlet flange. All exterior surfaces, ex- cept the Identification Label, are painted red. Clapper and Arm Assembly. The Clap- per (7) is assembled to the Clapper Arm (36) with Hex Nut (12) and Printed in U.S.A. 1-84 —1— TD 107 (Formerly TD 19) Front B A Ll E Right Side 4"/100 mm Valve Inches MM A—End to End of Valvet ..........15.00 381.0 B—To Top of Priming Cup ... ... ...... 9.50 241.3 C—To Outside of Priming Cup .......11.25 285.8 D—To Back of Drip Funnel ... .....11.75 298.5 E—To Outside of Air Supply Controls' ........ 9.75 247.7 F—To Outside of Main Drain Connections.... - . 11.00 279.4 G—To Outside of Main Drain Connections with the A-6 Accelerator ...... 18.50 469.9 H—To Outside of Alarm By -Pass Test Connections.. 11.50 292.1 J— To Outside of the A-6 Accelerator ..... . 23.00 584.2 6"/1150 mm Valve A—End to End of Valvet . ....17.00 431.8 B—To Top of Priming Cup .. - ......... 9.50 241.3 C—To Outside of Priming Cup .......12.50 317.5 D—To Back of Drip Funnel ... .....11.75 298.5 E—To Outside of Air Supply Controls* ..... 9.75 247.7 F—To Outside of Main Drain Connections .... ...12.00 304.8 G—To Outside of Main Drain Connections with the A-6 Accelerator .......19.50 495.3 H—To Outside of Alarm By -Pass Test Connections. ...12.50 317.5 J— To Outside of the A-6 Accelerator .......24.00 609.6 tDimensions apply to Models F302 and F3021 Valves. "Add 3" (76 mm) if Low Pressure Alarm Switch is used. FIGURE C DIMENSIONS OF VALVE AND TRIMMINGS utilized to provide the majority of force necessary to hold the waterway Clapper closed; in this case about 75 percent. System pressure acting direct- ly down on the waterway Clapper pro- vides the balance of the force neces- sary to hold it closed. The mechan- ical advantage of the F302/F3021 linkage was established so that nom - _ACCELERATOR SUPPORT PLUG n -28 c r1 0011 iassl 1J FIGURE D ALTERNATE MAIN DRAIN CONNECTIONS FOR SUPPORTING A-6 ACCELERATOR inally 1 psi of system air pressure can resist about 6 psi of water supply pres- su re. Referring to Figure A, in the set posi- tion, the Auxiliary Clapper Facing (Item 23) contacts the entire outside edge of the Auxiliary Clapper Seat Ring (Item 20) and creates a seal at this interface. When this seal is made, system pressure entering the Auxili- ary Chamber (Item 28) through the hollow Tube (Item 31) presses inward against the Auxiliary Clapper (Item 24). The Auxiliary Clapper, in turn, forces the Auxiliary Clapper/Clapper Rod (Item 18), and therefore, the Auxiliary Push Rod Screw (Item 16) to bear against the Clapper Latch (Item 14). The Clapper Latch bears downward against the nose of the Clapper Arm (Item 36); and, the Clap- per Arm exerts the added restraining force against the waterway Clapper (Item 7) and Clapper Facing (Item 6) necessary for holding the valve closed. The purpose of the Auxiliary Clapper Spring (Item 27) is to hold the Auxili- ary Clapper Facing against the outside edge of the Auxiliary Seat Ring while priming water is being added to the valve and system air pressure is being established. When a sprinkler opens, the system air pressure decreases with a resulting decrease in the forces exerted by the Auxiliary Clapper and the waterway Clapper on the waterway Clapper Fac- ing. When these combined forces re- duce to a value slightly below that of the upward force exerted by the water supply pressure, the waterway Clapper begins to lift. This permits supply water to enter the groove in the water- way Seat Ring (Item 2 of Figure A) and escape through the Alarm Port (Item 52 of Figure A) which is norm- ally at atmospheric pressure. Referring to Figure B, water from the Alarm Port is transmitted by the trim- mings to the Automatic Drain Valve, the Connection for Alarm Devices, and the feedback connection to the Auxili- ary Chamber. When the flow out the —3— LOW PRESSURE ;ALARM SWITCH 1/2 ° CHECK AIR SUPPLY VALVECONTRROL (ITEM 8, FIG. B41/2" VALVE(ITEM 5, FIG.8) 0 TEE 1/2 x 11/2" NIPPLE FIGURE E LOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH CONNECTION Alarm Port is sufficient, the Automa- tic Drain Valve will shut. This causes the water pressure in the feedback connection of the Auxiliary Chamber to be increased and the differential pressure across the Auxiliary Clapper to be neutralized. The bearing force exerted by the Push Rod Screw against the Clapper Latch is, therefore, elimin- ated and the force of the water supply is free to raise the waterway Clapper to its upper latched (fully open) pos- ition. PRESSURE LOSS The pressure loss resulting from friction generated by water flowing through the Dry Pipe Valve is expressed in terms of equivalent feet of pipe — 10 feet of 4 inch pipe for the 4 inch valve and 15 feet of 6 inch pipe for the 6 inch valve. INSTALLATION (Fig. B) Basic Trimmings and Bill of Materials are shown in Figure B. Figure C shows the dimensions of the Dry Pipe Valves and the minimum clearances which must be allowed for the trimmings. For ease of installation, the trimmings should be mounted in the following sequence: • By-pass between Connections 50, 51 and 52 (Fig. A) in the Body • Priming Test Connections • Priming Connections • Main Drain Connections. If an A-6 Accelerator is required, install the Main Drain Connections in accord- ance with Figure D. Other attachments to the valve may include one or more of the following: • Air Maintenance Device • Low pressure alarm switch • Dry pipe valve accelerator • Alarm devices Air pressure to the system may be supplied from a separate air compres- sor or from the owner's air system. It may be controlled manually by the Air Supply Control Valve (Fig. B) or automatically by an air maintenance device. The Pressure Relief Valve (Item 9 in Figure B) is factory set to relieve at a pressure of approximately 45 psi. If the maximum normal system air pres- sure is less than or exceeds 40 psi, the relief valve must be reset to relieve at a pressure which is in accordance with the requirements of the authority hav- ing jurisdiction. Connections to an air compressor or to the owner's air system are to be made with pipe and fittings not smaller than 1/2 inch. When an own- er's air manual fill system is used, an additional control valve (similar to Item 5 in Figure B) is to be installed at the Air Supply Connection to the dry pipe valve trim. When supervision of the sprinkler sys- tem air pressure is required, a low pres- sure alarm switch is to be installed as shown in Figure E and in accordance with the instructions given in its Tech- nical Data Sheet. If an Air Maintenance Device is to be used, it must be installed in accord- ance with the requirements given in its Technical Data Sheet. Alarm devices must be installed in accordance with instructions given in their respective Technical Data Sheets. If an accelerator is required, refer to its Technical Data Sheet for installa- tion instructions. Discharge from the Main Drain Valve and from the Drip Funnel (12) is to be piped to a suitable receiver or through the building wall above the snow line and where discharging water will not cause any damage. The drains may be connected provided a swing type check valve is used to prevent a back flow through the drip funnel. All pipe, nipples and fittings must be clean and free of scale and burrs be- fore installation. Use pipe joint com- pound sparingly on male threads only. RESETTING After the Dry Pipe Valve has operated, the Clapper (7) will not automatically reseat. The Dry Pipe Valve must be reset and the system restored to ser- vice as soon as possible. The procedure is as follows: Close the system's Main Coptrol and Air Supply Control Valves. If the system has an Accelerator, close the Accelerator Control Valve in the connections between the Accelerator and the system piping. 2. Open the Main Drain Valve (Fig. B) and all auxiliary drains in the sys- tem. Close the auxiliary drains when water ceases to discharge; leave the Main Drain Valve open. 3. If the alarms were silenced during system operation, open the Alarm Control Valve. 4. Replace all sprinklers that opera- ted. Replacement sprinklers must be of the same type and tempera- ture rating as those which oper- ated. 5. Disassemble the Strainer (10—Fig. B), thoroughly clean and reas- semble. 6. Remove the Handhole Cover (32) and thoroughly clean all interior parts of the valve. Inspect the Clapper Facing (6) and the Seat Ring (2) for physical damage. Test the Clapper Arm (36) and the Latches (8, 11, 14) for freedom of movement. Remove the Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover (28) and the Aux- iliary Clapper Spring (27). Check to see that the Auxiliary Clapper Assembly moves freely all the way into and out of the Auxiliary Seat Ring. Remove the Auxiliary Clap- per Assembly and check to see that the Auxiliary Clapper Rod (18) and its O-ring (19) are com- pletely coated with lubricant. If the Auxiliary Clapper Assembly does not move freely or the Aux- iliary Clapper Rod requires lubri- cant, clean both the Auxiliary Clapper Rod and its bore within the Auxiliary Seat Ring. Com- pletely coat the Auxiliary Clapper Rod with Dow Corning FS3452 Flurosilicone Grease. 8. Check to see that the Tube (31) passageway between the auxil- iary chamber and main cavity is wide open. Remove any foreign matter by scraping clear thru the opening with a metal rod. Remove debris from the valve. 9. Unlatch the Clapper/Clapper Arm Assembly from its operated posi- tion. Pivot the Latches (14, 8) to allow the Clapper to be reseated. 10. Uniformly cup the Auxiliary Clap- per Facing (23) towards the Aux- iliary Clapper Rod (18) and rein- stall the Auxiliary Clapper Assem- bly in the side of the valve. Care must be exercised to avoid damag- ing the O -Ring (19) when the Auxiliary Clapper Rod is inserted in the hole through the Auxiliary Clapper Seat Ring (20). 11. Rotate the Clapper Latch (14) and firmly engage it with the upper slanted surface (nose) of the Clapper Arm (36). 12. While holding the Clapper Latch and the Clapper Arm firmly en- gaged, replace the Auxiliary Clap- —4— per Spring (27) and place the Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover (28) in its proper position against the Body of the valve. While firmly holding the Cover in place — do not allow the spring load to re- lax — release the Clapper Latch and secure the Auxiliary Cover to the valve by uniformly tightening the Cover Screws (29). 13. Replace the Handhole Cover (32) and uniformly tighten the Cover Screws (40). 14. Open the Priming Valve (Fig. B) and Priming Test Valve (Fig. B). 15. Prime the Dry Pipe Valve by slow- Ij pouring water into the Priming Cup (Fig. B). When water dis- charges into the Drip Funnel (12— Fig. B), cease pouring water and close the Priming Test Valve and the Priming Valve. 16. Pressurize the system to approx- imately 20 psi. While pressurizing the system, hold the Plunger of the Automatic Drain Valve (Fig. B) depressed since water and/or air may discharge. If this condi- tion occurs and the Automatic Drain Valve is allowed to close, the Dry Pipe Valve may trip. If water and/or air does not dis- charge or subsequently stops dis- charging before 4 psi system air pressure is established, the Plunger may be released. 17. After 20 psi system air pressure has been established, individually open all auxiliary drains in the system piping to drain any water remaining in trapped sections. Close the drains as soon as water ceases to discharge. 18. Refer 'to the table in "Care and Maintenance — Air Pressure" and, admit to the system sufficient air pressure to hold the Dry Pipe Valve closed against the system water supply pressure. 19. After the required system air pressure has been established, close the two control valves in the air supply line if the system is not equipped with an Air Maintenance Device. 20. Close the Main Drain Valve and slowly open the system's Main Control Valve (Fig. B). Depress the Automatic Drain Valve Plung- er to determine if the Clapper Facings (6, 23) are properly seated. The facings are properly seated if there is no discharge when the Plunger is depressed. 21. If water discharges when the Automatic Drain Valve Plunger is depressed as noted in Instruction 20, the cause of the discharge must be remedied. Close the sys- tem's Main Control Valve and open the Main Drain Valve. Close the Air Supply Control Valve (if appropriate) and open the Inspec- tor's Test Connection to relieve the air pressure from the system. Remove the Plug (42—Fig. A) to drain the valve priming water; re- place the Plug when water ceases to drain. Repeat the applicable procedures detailed in Instruc- tions 6 through 20 until the Auto- matic Drain Valve Plunger can be depressed without water discharg- ing. The priming water must be re- tained before the system is placed in service. 22. Reset the accelerator if the system is so equipped. Refer to its Tech- nical Data Sheet for instructions. 23. Open the Alarm Control Valve if it has been closed. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Principal items of concern in the care and maintenance of dry pipe valves and systems are the system air pres- sure, valve priming water, Automatic Drain Valve (Fig. B), alarms and aux- iliary drains. NOTE Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system which it controls, permission to shut down the affected fire protection sys- tem must be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this action must be notified. Air Pressure. Design of the Dry Pipe Valve is such that one psi system air pressure will hold the valve closed against approximately six psi water supply pressure; consequently, proper maintenance of system air pressure is essential. The following table, based upon the approximate six to one trip ratio of the valve plus a safety factor, is a tabulation of air pressure require- ments for various water supply pres- sures. Maximum Minimum Water Recommended Supply Air Pressure, psi Pressure, psi 25 15 50 20 75 25 100 30 125 35 150 40 175 45 NOTES If a low pressure alarm switch is to be used, refer to its Technical Data Sheet for the minimum required air pressure which may be higher than the value obtained from the above table. If a fire pump is used in the water sup- ply, the minimum recommended air pressure is S psi more than the value indicated in the above table and the fire pump relief valve setting is to be considered as the water supply pres- sure. Priming Water. Priming water must be maintained at the proper level in the Dry Pipe Valve. Significant loss of priming water may result in false oper- ation of the valve. Accumulation of additional water will retard the opera- tion of the valve. To check the priming water, slowly open the Priming Test Valve (Fig. B). If water discharges into the Drip Funnel (12—Fig. B), the level of the priming water is too high and must be permitted to drain. Close the Test Valve as soon as water ceases to dis- charge. If air discharges when the Priming Test Valve is opened, the priming water level may be too low. Quickly close the Test Valve and inspect the Drip Funnel. If there is no evidence of prolonged leakage from the Auto- matic Drain Valve (Fig. B), replenish the priming water in accordance with the following instructions. 1. Close the system's Main Control and Air Supply Control Valves. If the system has an accelerator, close the Accelerator Control Valve in the connections between the accel- erator and the system piping. 2. Open the Main Drain Valve (Fig. B) to relieve the pressure below the Clapper (7—Fig. A). 3. Open the Inspector's Test or Prim- ing Test Valve (Fig. B) to relieve the air pressure from the system. 4. Prime the Dry Pipe Valve in accord- ance with Instructions 14 and 15 for "Resetting", pressurize the sys- tem and restore it to service in accordance with Instructions 16 through 21. 5. If the system has an accelerator, slowly open the Accelerator Con- trol Valve. Automatic Drain Valve. The Automa- tic Drain Valve (Fig. B) is an automa- tic drain for leaks resulting from an improperly seated Clapper (7—Fig. A) or Auxiliary Clapper (24—Fig. A). Failure of the Automatic Drain Valve may result in false operation of the Dry Pipe Valve. Therefore, the Auto- matic Drain Valve Plunger should be frequently depressed to be sure it is not stuck in a closed position. The ball in the valve should always have complete freedom of movement. —5— Inspect the Drain Funnel (12—Fig. B). Evidence of prolonged leakage from the Automatic Drain Valve indicates an improperly seated Clapper (7—Fig. A) or Auxiliary Clapper (24—Fig. A). The following procedure then applies. 1. Close system's Main Control and Air Supply Control Valves. If the system has an Accelerator, close the Accelerator Control Valve in the connections between the Acceler- ator and the system piping. 2. Open the Main Drain Valve (Fig. B). Open the Inspector's Test or Priming Test Valve (Fig. B) to re- lieve the air pressure from the sys- tem. 3. Remove the Plug (42—Fig. A). Re- place the Plug when water ceases to drain; leave the Main Drain Valve open. 4. Remedy the improper seating of the Clapper (7—Fig. A) and/or Aux- iliary Clapper (24—Fig. A) in ac- cordance with Resetting Instruc- tions 6 through 20. Worn or dam- aged parts must be replaced before the Dry Pipe Valve is placed back in service. 5. If the system has an accelerator, slowly open the Accelerator Con- trol Valve. Alarms. Operation of system alarms should be tested quarterly. To test the alarms, turn the Alarm Test Valve (Fig. B) to an open position. This per- mits a flow of water through the alarm test by-pass to actuate the system alarms. Turn the Test Valve back to the closed position to silence the alarms. NOTE Before testing alarms, notification must be given to the owner and the fire department, central station or other signal station to which the alarms are connected. Auxiliary Drains. Auxiliary drains in trapped or low sections of the system piping should be opened frequently to drain water that may have accumu- lated from condensation. Quickly close the drains as soon as air dis- charges. NOTES If the system has an accelerator, close the Accelerator Control Valve before opening an auxiliary drain. Open the Accelerator Control Valve after the draining operation is complete. Before opening auxiliary drains, it is advisable to close the system's Main Control Valve. Be sure the Main Con- trol Valve is left open after the drains have been closed. A4 DRY PIPE VALVE, MODEL F302 & F3021 WARRANTY Seller warrants for a period of one year from the date of shipment (war- ranty period) that the products fur- nished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. For further details on Warranty, see Price List. ORDERING PROCEDURE All orders for the Model F302 or F3021 Dry Pipe Valves, trimmings, and replacement parts must reference the Product Symbol Number (PSN) for the item required. Refer to the appropriate Technical Data Sheet for ordering information with regard to; alarm devices, acceler- ator, air maintenance device, or low pressure alarm switch. Valve Assemblies: 4" Model F302 Dry Pipe Valve ........ PSN 52-302-1-013 4" Model F3021 Dry Pipe Valve .. .. .. . PSN 52-302-1-413 6" Model F302 Dry Pipe Valve . .. .. . . . ............. PSN 52-302-1-015 6" Model F3021 Dry Pipe Valve ... . . . . . .... ...... .. PSN 52-302-1-615 Trimmings: Basic Trimmings for Model F302/F3021 Dry Pipe Valve .... PSN 52-347-1-001 Replacement Parts: The Clapper Assembly listed in the following valve replacement parts lists consists of Items 3-7 and 12, Figure A. The Clapper and Clapper Arm Assembly consists of Items 3-8, 10-13, 36, 39 and 41 shown in Figure A. The Auxiliary Clapper Assembly consists of Items 16, 18, 19, 22-24, 26, 34 and 38 shown in Figure A. ` Items 3, 4, 25, 29, 37, 40, and 41 listed in Figure A are common hard- ware items and are to be obtained lo- cally. Items 1, 2, 20, 21 and 31 are not field replaceable and thus are not in- cluded in the following valve replace- ment parts lists. All other items listed in -igure A are available. To order re- placement parts, specify descriptions and Product Symbol Numbers and in- dicate the model and size of the valve for which the parts are required. 4"/100 mm Model F302/F3021 Dry Pipe Valve (Fig. A) Pipe Valve (Fig. A) 5—Clapper Washer.. ...92-302-1-405 5—Clapper Washer. . . 6—Clapper Facing ... ..92-302-1-406 6—Clapper Facing .. .. 7—Clapper ......92-302-1-407 7—Clapper . . .. 8—Lower Latch ... ...92-302-1-608 8—Lower Latch ... .. 9—Washer. .. .. 92-302-1-409 10—Socket Head Shoulder Screw . .. .... . ..62-614-1-004 11—Upper Latch ......92-302-1-411 .62-614-1-004 12—Clapper Nut.. . . ..92-741-1-013 .92-302-1-611 13—Upper Latch Pin ....92-302-1-613 14—Clapper Latch ...92-302-1-414 15—Clapper Latch Pin . . .92-302-1-415 16—Push Rod Screw . .92-302-1-615 w/Spirol Pin (34). . . .92-302-1-639 18—Auxiliary Clapper ..92-302-1-639 Rod ... .. . ... . .92-302-1-618 19—O -Ring.......... 62-561-1-111 22—Auxiliary Clapper . 62-561-1-111 Facing Retainer . ...92-302-1-622 23—Auxiliary Clapper Facing . . .... . 92-302-1-640 24—Auxiliary Clapper .. .92-302-1-624 26—Lock nut .. .. .... 92-302-1-626 27—Auxiliary Clapper . 92-302-1-626 Spring .. ... .. ..92-302-1-627 28—Auxiliary Clapper . .92-302-1-627 Chamber Cover.. . .92-302-1-628 30—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber . .92-302-1-628 Cover Gasket . ... ..92-302-1-630 Cover Gasket . .. . 32—Handhole Cover . . ..92-302-1-432 —6- 33—Handhole Cover Gasket. . . ... 92-302-1-433 35—Clapper Arm Pin . ...92-302-1-435 36—Clapper Arm . . . . . .92-302-1-436 38— Locknut ......... 92-302-1-638 39-1/8" x 1'/4" Spirol Pin. 62-496-1-056 43—Belleville Spring .. . .62-404-1-018 —Clapper Assembly .. .52-302-1-101 —Clapper/Clapper Arm Assembly . . ... ..52-302-1-102 —Auxiliary Clapper Assembly . ..52-302-1-103 —1.5 gms of FS3452*. . 92-302-1-641 —2 oz. of FS3452 . . . .92-302-1-642 *Sufficient for one application of lubricant to Auxiliary Clapper Rod. 6"/150 mm Model F302/F3021 Dry Pipe Valve (Fig. A) 5—Clapper Washer. . . . .92-302-1-605 6—Clapper Facing .. .. .92-302-1-606 . 7—Clapper . . .. . .92-302-1-607 8—Lower Latch ... .. .92-302-1-608 9—Washer.. . . 92-302-1-609 10—Socket Head Shoulder Screw . . . .. .. .62-614-1-004 11—Upper Latch .. . .. .92-302-1-611 12—Clapper Nut. . . ...92-741-1-015 13—Upper Latch Pin . ...92-302-1-613 14—Clapper Latch ...92-302-1-614 15—Clapper Latch Pin . . .92-302-1-615 16—Push Rod Screw w/Spirol Pin (34). . ..92-302-1-639 18—Auxiliary Clapper Rod .... .. .. . ..92-302-1-618 19 -0 -Ring. ... . .. .. . 62-561-1-111 22—Auxiliary Clapper Facing Retainer ....92-302-1-622 23—Auxiliary Clapper Facing .. .. . ... 92-302-1-640 24—Auxiliary Clapper . . .92-302-1-624 26—Lock n ut .. .. ... . 92-302-1-626 27—Auxiliary Clapper Spring .. . ... . .92-302-1-627 28—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover.. . .92-302-1-628 30—Auxiliary Clapper Chamber Cover Gasket . .. . ..92-302-1-630 —6- 0 Registered trademark of GRINNELL CORPORATION, 3 TYCO PARK, EXETER, NH 03833 32—Handhole Cover ....92-302-1-632 33—Handhole Cover Gasket.. ....92-302-1-633 35—Clapper Arm Pin . ...92-302-1-635 36—Clapper Arm ......92-302-1-636 38—Locknut......... 92-302-1-638 39-1/8" x 1'/*" Spirol Pin. 62-496-1-056 43—Belleville Spring ....62-404-1-019 —Clapper Assembly ...52-302-1-201 —Clapper/Clapper Arm Assembly ........52-302-1-202 —Auxiliary Clapper Assembly .. . ..52-302-1-203 —1.5 gms of FS3452*. . 92-302-1-641 —2 oz. of FS3452 ....92-302-1-642 *Sufficient for one application of lubricant to Auxiliary Clapper Rod. Basic Trimmings (Fig. B) 1—'/." Gauge Test Valve .. PSN 46-005-1-002 2-250 lb. Air Pressure Gauge ....... PSN 92-343-1-012 3-300 Ib. Water Pressure Gauge ....... PSN 92-343-1-005 4—'/<" Globe Valve . PSN 46-047-1-002 5-1/2" Globe Valve . PSN 46-047-1-004 6—'/2" Ball Valve... PSN 46-050-1-004 7—%:" Spring Loaded Check Valve. ... PSN 92-322-1-002 8—'/z" Swing Type Check Valve.... PSN 46-049-1-004 9—'/<" Pressure Relief Valve.... PSN 92-343-1-020 10—%:" Y -Strainer... PSN 52-353-1-005 11-2 ' F791 Automatic Drain Valve.... PSN 52-791-1-004 12—Drip Funnel.... PSN 92-343-1-007 13—Drip Funnel Support... ... PSN 92-347-1-007 14—Drip Funnel Support Plug .. . PSN 92-347-1-008 15—Alarm Vent Bushing.. .... PSN 92-032-1-001 16—Priming Cup ... PSN 92-346-1-004 17-2" Globe Valve.. PSN 46-047-1-009 Items listed in Figure B, but not in- cluded in the preceding replacement parts lists are common hardware items and are to be obtained locally. Orders for replacement parts for Basic Trim- mings need only specify descriptions and Product Symbol Numbers of the parts required. CONVERSION FACTORS Parenthetical metric conversions cited here- in are approximate. 1 inch = 25.400 mm 1 pound = 0.4536 kg 1 psi = 6.895 kPa = 0.689 bar* 0.0703 kg/cm2* 1 U.S. gallon = 3.785 dm3 3.785 liters* *Not recognized International System units. WEIGHTS The nominal weights of the Model F302 and F3021 Dry Pipe Valves are: 4" Model F302........107 pounds 4" Model F3021 ........97 pounds 6" Model F302........165 pounds 6" Model F3021 .......151 pounds t 9.1! •' ,.✓�v4$. -,'} is 4 i � * �t 4 � r !. r n fix �i 1 Y �.; t jF t y. N t 9.1! •' ,.✓�v4$. -,'} is 4 i � * �t t r n fix �i 1 Y �.; 1..l �t.All Contents Section L Introduction 1.1 How to Use This Manual..... 1.2 Optional Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 Section 2. Specifications and System 1-2 Planning 2.1 Electrical Specifications ................ ................................................................... 2.2 Environmental Specifications.... ..................................................................... 2-1 2.3 Wiring Specifications ... 2-1 Section 3. Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements 9 ements 3.1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) .................. 3.2 Underwriters Laboratories .............................................. stories (U 3.2.1 R L) ................................... equirements 3-1 forA111nstallatio 3.2.2 Requirements for Central Station ••••••••••••••••..... 3-2 Fire Alarm Systems..,,•..•. ..................... 3.2.3 Requirements for Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm Systems .2.4 Requirements 3-2 . for Fire Alarm Service' 3-3 ery ' for Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems ice ................ 3.3 Califomia Fire 3-3 Marshal (CFM)................................................................... - Polarity olari Bever lar tY sal................. 3.4 Factory Mutual (FM) 3-3 ...................... ............................ 3.5 Materials .................................................................... 3-4 and Equipment Board of Acceptance Division (MEA) .................................................... 3-4 Section 4. Installation Overview ..... 3-4 4.1 Model 5207 Wiring Diagram................................................................................................................ 4.2 Current Draw Worksheet.... 4.2.1 Worksheet Example 4- .......................... 4.2.2 Worksheet Requirements""" ............................... ........................................ 4-2 ........................................................................................ Section 5. Control Panel Installation 4-4 5.1 Power Supply Wiring ....... AC....P..o...w..e......"........................ S. II Connecting th.e......... 1.2 Selecting the Power SuPPhOutPutV '............................... oltage.............5.13 Connecting the 5I97 to Batteries 5-2 ..r............... 5.2 Mounting the ..I..97to .5 5.3 Terminal Strip ...................................5-2S S-3 Description P n.................................................................................. 5.4 Telephone Line 5-4 Connection 5.5 Cable Connectors ....................... 5-4 .............. 5.6 XBUS Connector 56 .......................... 5-7 5-7 150865 Contents n Section 9. Central Station Reporting 9.1 Special Considerations.......................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Reporting Formats......................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.2.1 SIA Format Printed Messages...................................................................................................... 9-2 9.2.2 FSK & SK 4+2 Format................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.2.3 Radionics BFSK Format............................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.416 -Zone 4+2 Format.................................................................................................................... 9-7 Section 10. Manual Revision History 150865 / Rev. 1/96 Contents Tables Table 1-1. Compatible Modules (Manufactured by —Silent Table 4- 1. Battery Calculations......... Knight) ................................................................. 1-2 Table 4-2. ....... Maximum Battery Standby Load ......... ....................................... I .............................................. Table 5- 1. Terminal Strin n ............................................. Table 6-1, Table 6-2. Table 6-3. Table 6-4. Table 6-5. Table 6-6. Table 7-1. cr,PLIOIIS 4-4 4-5 Compatible Four -Wire Smoke Detectors ............................... 5-4 Compatible 12 -Volt Smoke Detectors..* .................................... Compatible 24 -Volt Smoke Detectors ............................................ 6-3 ... Model 5230 Dip Switch Settings ................................................................. ............ 6-5 Compatible 12 -Volt Notification 6-6 Devices Compatible 24 -Volt Notification 6-13 Devices ................................................................................... 6-17 Model 5230 Basic Functions 6-18 Table 8-1. Mode 25 Voltage Calculations 7-2 Table 8-2. System Messages and Codes 8-3 Table 9- 1. SIA Messages 8-4 ................................................................................................................................. Table 9-2. FSK & SK 4+2 Codes/Zones ....... Table 9-3. Radionics BFSK 4+2 ............... * Format 9-2 Table 9-4. ......................... ........................................................................... 16 -Zone 4+2 9-4 9-6 9-7 150865 /Rev. 1/96 v Section 1. Introduction The Model 5207 is an 8 -zone fire alarm control panel (expandable up to 16 zones) with a digital communicator that meets NFPA 72 requirements. The 5207 comes with a field selectable 12 or 24 VDC power supply. The 5207 cabinet can be surface mounted or semi - flush mounted. 1.1 How to Use This Manual The Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual (PIN 150865) is intended for those persons involved with the installation and maintenance of the 5207 panel. It covers installation details including wiring, connection to compatible products, normal operation, troubleshooting, and central station reporting. The Model 5207 documentation now includes a separate programming manual. Refer to the Model 5207 Fire ControUCommunicator Programming Manual (PIN 150866) for programming information. r� The installation and programming manuals are comprehensive guides. They provide detailed instructions and can be used for reference. The installation manual is organized chronologically by the tasks that need to be performed to get the panel operating according to your needs. You can skip sections that do not apply to your installation. This manual is intended to be used with printed circuit board (PCB), Revision M. If you are using a different board, please contact Silent Knight Security Systems (see contact information in Section 3) for the appropriate instructions. In this manual, the following conventions are used: FK-E-Yj A clear rectangle represents a key that you press on a touchpad. E .l Shaded displays represent messages that you see on a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the seven -segment (built-in touchpad) p r, r - j display. 150865 1-1 Section 2. Specifications and System y tem Planning 2.1 Electrical Specifications Primary AC Total DC Load Accessory Power Smoke Power Battery Charging Voltage Batta' Charging Current Class A (style D) Circuit Current Telephone mum Input Sensitivity Good Phone Line Voltage Maximum Low Battery Dem Minimum Low AC Detect Maximum Watchdog Response Time 12 -Volt Selection 120 Vrms at 60 Iiz, 2A 6A 9.2 V to 134v 'max, A 9.2 V to 13.8 V max. 13.65 2.62 A max. 60 mA max. 45 dB 3V 10.2 98 4 sec. 24 -Volt Selection 120 Vrms at 60 Hz, 2A 5A 9.2 V to 13.8 mmax. q 18.4 V. to 27.6 V. max. 27.3 2.62 A max 60 mA max. 45 dB 20.4 ---_-- 98 - 4 sec 2.2 Environmental Specifications It is important to protect the 5207 control panel from water. To prevent water dam following conditions should be AVOIDED when mounting the units; age, the • Do not mount directly on exterior walls, especially p Y maso my walls (condensation) • Do not mount directl on J extenor walls below grade (condensation) • Protect from plumbing leaks • Protect from splash caused by sprinkler system inspection ports • Do not mount in areas with humidity -generating tygenerating equipment (such as dryers, production When selecting a location to mount the 5207 control panel, the unit should be mo to temperatures outside the range of 0°C -49°C 32 Fd where it will NOT be exposed or humidity outside the range of 10%-85% at 30°C (86°F) noncondensing. ( 20°F) See also the mounting recommendations in Section 5.2 for additional environmental specifications. 150865 2-1 Section 3. Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements 3.1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 1. If requested by the telephone company, the following information must be provided before the 5207 can be connected to the phone lines: A. Manufacturer: B. Model Number: C. FCC registration number Ringer equivalence: D. Type of jack (to be installed by the telephone company Silent Knight Security Systems 5207 AC6USA-65475-AL-E 0.911 RJ31 X 2. This device may not be directly connected to coin telephone or party line services. 3. This device cannot be adjusted or repaired in the field. In case of trouble with the device, notify the installing company or return to: Silent Knight Security Systems 7550 Meridian Circle Maple Grove, MN 553694927 612493-6455 800-328-0103 4. If the 5207 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify the user in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. When advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the user as soon as possible. Users have the right to file complaints, if necessary, with the Federal Communications Commission. 5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice to allow you to make the necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. 150865 3-1 Section 3. Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements 3.2.2 Requirements for Central Systems Station Fire Alarm Refer to the 5207 progi'ammin Model 5521 g manual, Sections 2 and 3 for more details on using the and Model 5230 to select options. Select Options: 1' The Ground Fault Detection Model 5521 (Menus) Step pro grammin g option must be selected. System Options (Steepsps)) Step 5 2 The Phone Line #2 Enable option must be selected. Dialer Options 3. The Phone Line Monitor Enable option must be selected.Step Dialer options Step 9 4. The Total Attempts must be set for at least five attempts, but no more than 10 Dialer Options 9 Step 10 5• Do NOT select the Ground Startoption. 6• Dialer options You must select a phone number for the Report Test To Phone Dialer Options Step 9 Number 1 Option, so that the 5207 -4 transmits an Step 14.4 automatic daily test. 7• On class A (style D) zones, the number of waterflow devices ' Section 6.1.1. is limited to five. See 8. Auxiliary relays may not be programmed to activate for Pre - Alarm. See Section 6.6. 3.2.3 Requirements for Auxilia p Systems for Fire Alarm Sergi Protected Fire Alarm 1 • Follow the current load restriction shown in Section 4 2. The Model 5220 Direct Connect module must be installed (see Section 6.4.3 for wiring). 3.2.4 Requirements for Remote Station Alarm Systems - Polarity Protected Fire 1 • Follow the current load restrictions shown Reversal 2• The Model 5220 Direct Connect module in Section 4.2.2. must be installed (see Section 6.4.3 for wiring). 150865 Section 4. Installation Overview 4.1 Model 5207 Wiring Diagram Figure 4-1 is a wiring diagram for wiring the Model 5207 panel. Section 5.4 _ Telephone Line Connection section 6.1.1. Section 6.1.2 Earth Ground - _ I� O ALARM O MEMORY v-� Supervised Phos Line 1 I Supervised Phone Line 2 8 B O SUNCED O TROUBLE `� To OAC/DC �" RJ31X R To � "—' RJ31X i Dialer Failed TOUCHPAD T136 I 12VDC 1t10mA Max. i; Active Low 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47* P4 *Power limited circuits Status -- Gr«ndWl 1 46 Z;i 1-2(TB11 2* TB1 45 Control TB5 44 3 7 g 10 N.O. irdtlatirp devkes 4 only Max. of five 43 roue NFP P72 �41 5* Dialer 42 RM�npu 100�Otxne 6 * Control ® Slyle B) — csalass 8 ed Zones znrres 3 - e (52) Ground 7 g 10 N rt ( j 40 39 38 Do 37 E) ® 13 13 Section 6.3. ESL 2 T diatectors 429CT i See smoke del. mquirements note Mum a3oOhms Section 62. emeke G- FouriWre detectors smoke detectors PAM -2A EOL Relay Modub 1 36 Relay #1 Section 6.4.1. Model 4180 Status Display module Section 6.4.3.4. Wiring for Supervision Relay #2 Relay #3 Section 6.5. Notification Device Relay #4 Outputs Section 5.5. 5230 Quick Connect Any device connected to terminal 26 must be UL listed for fire use and rated at 12V/24V. Section 6.4.2. 5ection 5.1. Section 6.4.3. Section 6.4.4. 5210 Zone Expander Power Supply WIHng 5220 Direct Connect Module Figure 4-1. Model 5207 Wiring Reference 150865 / Rev. 1/96 4_1 11 35 12* ' 4* 3,0F&- 33-701 13 13 EEPROM _. 14 > It 32 15* 31 ® 16 T132 a T134 30 -- - u: 17 > 29 FV - 18* 1 2 19 27 20uncal onCr' Cir ro XBUS Model 5197 3 T133X tx NsMd sudbkv ani Worn icmw• smswoon e.5 �1 Power Su 21 22 23 24 25 26*for �° ep°x.`es.. / P2 1 P5 lzvoc or NVDC 1 P1 --0 _ - Remota Silence Keyswikh Model 5230 Annunciator Use UL listed keyswitch " ' N/O Mondry, 24V/.25A Mln. +1224 VDC r� Section 5.5. 5230 Quick Connect Any device connected to terminal 26 must be UL listed for fire use and rated at 12V/24V. Section 6.4.2. 5ection 5.1. Section 6.4.3. Section 6.4.4. 5210 Zone Expander Power Supply WIHng 5220 Direct Connect Module Figure 4-1. Model 5207 Wiring Reference 150865 / Rev. 1/96 4_1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 4.2 Current Draw Worksheet A B C * 77tis information must be used with Table 4-I and Table 4-2 to complete battery calculations. 4_2 150865 Section 4. Installation Overview 4.2.1 Worksheet Example The Current Draw worksheet is included to help you calculate the amount of current the system draws on standby and in an alarm condition. Refer to Table 4-2 for the different battery sizes available and the maximum standby current load each can support. Figure 4-2 illustrates how to complete the worksheet. The recommended order for filling out the form is indicated by the circled numbers (for example, (D). ' Cross out entire 0 rrow of any devices not used. ate. Do not write in shaded areas ( For devices with different standby and alarm currents, List the number of devices being used. be sure to do the calculation for each rating. OThe maximum number is shown in parentheses. The number "1" printed in this column indicates Fill in missing current ratings for the devices used. that only one device can be used. ® Note that some devices have different ratings for standby and alarm conditions. Number ofCurrent per Standby Alarm Device Devices Device Current Currant z /Communicator aranooy: 120 mA Alarm: mA 5210 Zone Expander 1 Standby: 40 mA Alarm: 40 mA 5230 Remote Annunciator 3 Standby: C0 (7 max.) Alarm: 120 5260 Printer Interface 1 Standby: 25 rru Alarm: 25 nu A Current Subtotals: Model xYZ Standb 16 Alarm: 773 Alarm: rn/ B Current Subtotab: TM current ratings of all devices in system (add A -D)*: 33�JA� E Total current ratings converted to amperes (x.001): Q L(,375 A OIn the blank spaces, write in any devices not For row E, add the subtotals from printed on the worksheet (smoke detectors, © rows A-V and multi 1 001. natification devices, etc.). PY 1'Y Figure 4-2. Current Draw Worksheet Example 150865 4-3 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 4.2.2 Worksheet Requirements The following steps must be taken when determining Model 5207 current ratings: 1. You must measure the alarm current. If only one current rating is listed, the draw for that device is the same whether the system is in alarm or standby' condition. The exception is for notification devices, which are rated at alarm current only. Standby current for notification devices is 0 mA. 2. To detect the actual maximum alarm current, measure the current draw (with no devices connected to the panel) by connecting a DC amp meter in series with one of the batteries. Disconnect the AC power source. Put the panel in alarm. The meter will indicate the alarm current, which will be in the range of 120-700 mA. Fill in the system alarm current in the Current per Device column of the Current Draw worksheet. You can estimate without measuring the alb current by filling in the maximum total alarm current of 700 mA. Note: In a 12 -volt system, measure the current from both batteries (disconnect both grounds). 3. For smoke detectors, notification devices, and devices not mentioned in the manual, refer to the device manual for the current ratings. The worksheet example shown on the previous page provides rough estimates for a "worst case" installation. 4. Use Table 4-1 to calculate the correct battery AH rating needed for your installation. See also the example (Figure 4-3) that follows. Note that the calculated rating in Row H cannot exceed the ratings shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-1. Battery Calculations * Use next size battery with capacity greater than required. 4-4 150865 Section 4. Installation Overview n This calculation is bared on the Current Draw worksheet example data. From this table, the installer would use a 17 AH battery Figure 4-3. Battery Calculation Example Warning Silent Knight does not support the use of batteries smaller than those listed in Table 4-2. If you use a battery too small for your installation, the system can overload and you may have less than the required 24 hours standby power. Use Table 4-1 to calculate the correct battery amperes/hour rating needed for your installation. 5. Refer to Table 4-2 to verify the battery size you need to provide at least the total standby current you have calculated. If the installation must meet requirements for NFPA 72 (Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm Systems for Fire Alarm Service or Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems - Polarity Reversal), the total standby current cannot exceed the amount shown in the last column of the following table: Table 4-2. Maximum Battery Standbv Load Rechargeable Battery Size Max. Load for 24 hrs. Standby, 5 mins. Alarm Total Standby Current Total Alarm Current A Total supervisory current from the 175 mA 34 AH (if wired in parallel) Current Draw worksheet (row E). 0389 A B Number of standby hours (24 and 60 for NFPA 72, Chapter 1, 1-5.2.5.). 24 H C Multiply lines A and B. 9.34 AH D Total alarm current from the Current Draw worksheet (row E). A E Alarm sounding period in hours. (For example, 5 minutes =.084 hours.) � $� F Multiply lines D and E. H G Add lines C and F. • AH 9.7 H Multiply line G by 1.2. AH (Total ampere/hours required*) 11.7 AH r Figure 4-3. Battery Calculation Example Warning Silent Knight does not support the use of batteries smaller than those listed in Table 4-2. If you use a battery too small for your installation, the system can overload and you may have less than the required 24 hours standby power. Use Table 4-1 to calculate the correct battery amperes/hour rating needed for your installation. 5. Refer to Table 4-2 to verify the battery size you need to provide at least the total standby current you have calculated. If the installation must meet requirements for NFPA 72 (Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm Systems for Fire Alarm Service or Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems - Polarity Reversal), the total standby current cannot exceed the amount shown in the last column of the following table: Table 4-2. Maximum Battery Standbv Load Rechargeable Battery Size Max. Load for 24 hrs. Standby, 5 mins. Alarm *Max. Load for 60 hrs. Standby, 5 mins. Alarm 17 AH 435 mA 175 mA 34 AH (if wired in parallel) 873 mA 350 mA RequireaJor IVP PA /l Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm Systems for Fire Service (City Box) and Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems (Polarity Reversal). 6. Ensure that the total current of all items attached to the 5207, including the 5207 itself, does not exceed 6 A for a 12 -volt system and 5 A fora 24 -volt system when the panel is in alarm (see Section 2.1). 150865 4-5 10-N /0"**, �Q Section 5. Control Panel Installation This section describes in detail how to install the major components of the Model 5207 PC board. Refer the wiring diagram in Section 4 for general board layout. Figure 5-1 shows the power supply wiring. 12 VDC Jumper Cable Position 0 000 .CAUTION* 0 0 High Voltage Disconnect AC/battery 120 VAC before servicing 80 Hz Pyr source 200 waft 1 2 3 SaCaq 2 Red Model 5207 P1 Jumper Cable (PM 130410) 124 VDC Jumper Cable Position Model OO 5197 Red Input VoRage: 120 VAC 60 Hz 200 Watts + Output Voltage: 24V Selection: 5 A Q 24 VDC, Y11 AQ 12 VDC 12V Selection: 6 A Q 12 VDC Figure 5-1. Power Supply Wiring 150865 5-1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 5.1 Power Supply Wiring The Model 5197 power supply delivers 24 VDC at 5 A or 12 VDC at 6 A for loop power, smoke detector power, notification device power, and accessory power. The Model 6914 is a 12 -Volt, 17 -AH battery. Warning To reduce the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all power has been turned off or disconnected before attempting to connect the Model 5197 power supply. Do NOT apply power to this panel until all accessories are properly connected. Note: All conduit and wiring connected to the 5207 must meet the applicable National Electric Code, NFPA Standards, state, and local building code requirements. In all cases, the authority having jurisdiction takes precedence. 5.1.1 Connecting the 5197 to AC Power The Model 5197 is mounted behind the power shield. • Connect the black wire from the 120 VAC 60 Hz source to terminal 1 on the 5197. • Connect the white (neutral) wire from the 120 VAC 60 Hz AC source to terminal 3 on the 5197. • Connect the ground wire from the 120 VAC 60 Hz source to terminal 2 on the 5197. 5.1.2 Selecting the Power Supply Output Voltage If you need to change the output voltage from 24 to 12 (or vice versa), follow steps 1-4 below. Figure 5-1 shows the locations of the output selection jumper cables. 1. Verify that you are using the correct voltage (per the instructions for the device you wish to use). 2. Remove 120 VAC power. 3. Disconnect batteries. 4. Pull the jumper cable up from its current position and insert it into the correct one. ___ 5-2 150865 Section 5. Control Panel Installation 5.1.3 Connecting the 5197 to Batteries The tables in Section 4 will help you decide what size battery to use. Caution Apply AC power before connecting the batteries to the power supply to prevent arcing on battery terminals. Note: When using two batteries, it is recommended that they be of the same ampere hour (AH) rating. Model 5197 Programmed for 12 VDC Power Supply The Model 5197 provides two sets of battery leads for connection of one or two 12 VDC batteries. When connecting a single battery, connect one of the red leads to the positive side of the battery. Connect a black lead to the negative side of the battery. If a second battery is used, connect the remaining read lead to the positive side of the second battery. Connect remaining black lead to the negative side of the second battery. Note: The total current draw on loop power, accessory power, and notification device outputs must not exceed 6 A. Model 5197 Programmed for 24 VDC Power Supply The Model 5197 provides two sets of battery leads to connect two 12 VDC batteries connected in series. 1. Connect the first red battery lead to the positive side of battery #1. 2. Connect the first black battery lead to the negative side of battery #1. 3. Connect the second red battery lead to the positive side of battery #2. 4. Connect the second black battery lead to the negative side of battery 42. Note: The total current draw on loop power, accessory power, and notification device outputs must not exceed 6 A (see output voltage in Figure 5-1). 150865 5-3 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 5.2 Mounting the 5207 Read the environmental specifications in Section 2.2 before mounting the 5207 panel. The panel should be accessible to "Main Drop" wiring runs. The 5207 panel should be located within a secured area, but should be accessible for testing and service. End-users responsible for maintaining the panel should be able to hear alarms and troubles. When selecting a location, keep in mind that the panel itself is the main source of alarm and trouble annunciation. When mounting on interior walls, use appropriate screw anchors in plaster. When mounting on concrete, especially when moisture is expected, attach a piece of 3/4 inch plywood to the concrete surface and then attach the 5207 to the plywood. Also mount any other desired components (such as an external printer) to the plywood. DO NOT flush -mount the 5207 cabinet in a wall designated as a fire break. 5.3 Terminal Strip Description The terminal strips on the PC board are nonremovable. Table 5-1 below lists the function and electrical rating of each terminal. See Section 4.1 for the wiring diagram. Table 64. Terminal Strip Descriptions Terminal Terminal Description Electrical Ratings 1 Circuit Ground 2 input class A (style D) Loop A Out Zone 1 ( P Zone 1 input (class A (style D Loop BOut 4 Zone 1 input (class A (style D) Loop B In 5 Zone 1 input (class A (style D) Loop A In 6 Zone 2 input (class A (style D) Loop A Out 7 Zone 2 input (class A (style D) Loop B Out g Zone 2 input (class A (style D) Loop B In 9 Zone 2 Input (class A (style D) Loop A In 10 Circuit Ground 11 Zone 3 Input (style B/class B) .: , ...........::............ 12 Loop Power Output 12 VDC or 24 VDC 13 Zone 4 Input (style B/class B) 14 Zone 5 Input (style B/class B) I S Loop Power Output 12 VDC or 24 VDC Table S-1 continued on next page. 5-4 150865 Section 5. Control Panel Installation We 5-1 continued. 21 Remote Silence 22 Annunciator Output mum 23 Annunciator Input 24 Annunciator Power Output +12 VDC nominal 25 Annunciator Ground 26 Accessory Power +12/24 VDC . can LIISU !!' 1lSt'.�AS [itQ71 i' SiTt1 Lill iltS E1 Sj1D14'1R QGl�YB 27 Notification device output #4 Negative 1 amp max. 28 Notification device output #4 Positive 1 amp max. 29 Notification device output #3 Negative 1 amp max. 30 Notification device output #3 Positive 1 amp max. 31 Notification device output #2 Negative 1 amp max. 32 Notification device output #2 Positive 1 amp max. 33 Notification device output # 1 Negative 1 amp max. 34 Notification device output #1 Positive 1 amp max. 35 Auxiliary Relay #4 Normally Open Contact 2.5 amp max. 36 AuxiliaryRelay#4 Common . .:: _. 37 Auxiliary Relay #4 Normally Closed Contact 2.5 amp max. 38 Auxiliary Relay #3 Normally Open Contact 2.5 amp max. 39 Auxiliary Relay #3 Common 40 Auxiliary Relay #3 Normally Closed Contact ........ 2.5 amp max. 41 Auxiliary Relay #2 Normally Open Contact 2.5 amp max. 42 Rela #2 Common Auxiliary Y 43 Auxiliary Relay #2 NormallyClosed Contact 2.5 amp max. 44 Auxiliary Relay #1 Normally Open Contact 2.5 amp max. 45 Auxiliary Relay #1 Common 46 Auxiliary Relay #1 Normally Closed Contact 2.5 amp max. Wim Table 5-1 continued on next page. 5-5 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual Table 5-1 continued. Terminal Terminal Description Electrical Ratings '16 7777 47 Dialer Failed Output Active Low) 100 mA, 12 VDC max. 48 House Phone 2 Tip El 49 House Phone 2 Ring 50 Telco 2 Tip 51 Telco 2 Ring 52 52 Earth Ground 53 House Phone 1 Tip 54 House Phone 1 Ring r5O 55 Telco 1 Tip 56 Telco 1 Ring 5.4 Telephone Line Connection The 5207 connects to two separate telephone lines to report data to the central station. A RJ31X jack should be installed by the telephone company for each line. Figure 5-2 shows how to wire the telephone line interconnect cords (not provided) to the 5207. Note: To reduce the possibility of false alarms and transient damage, DO NOT bundle telephone wires together with notification device wires. 47 (� Dialer Failed Output (Active Low) +12VDC 100 MA Max. Figure 5-2. Telephone Line Connection The 5207 has built-in dual phone line monitors. These circuits will detect any fault in the phone lines by monitoring the DC voltage present on the lines. They feature a delay of approximately 40 seconds before a line fault is reported as a trouble. When a fault is 5--6 150865 TELCO 1 RING RED 56 TELCO 1 TIP GREEN El 55 TELCO 1 RING GRAY Model 7660 TELCO 1 TIP BROWN Cord Earth Ground TELCO 2 RING RED 54 53 52 TELCO 2 TIP GREEN TELCO 2 RING GRAY Modal 7060 r5O TELCO 2 TIP BROWN Cord 48 47 (� Dialer Failed Output (Active Low) +12VDC 100 MA Max. Figure 5-2. Telephone Line Connection The 5207 has built-in dual phone line monitors. These circuits will detect any fault in the phone lines by monitoring the DC voltage present on the lines. They feature a delay of approximately 40 seconds before a line fault is reported as a trouble. When a fault is 5--6 150865 Section 5. Control Panel Installation detected, the audible trouble signal will sound and the trouble will be reported to the central station over the remaining phone line. A situation could occur where both phone lines appear to be good, but the dialer cannot get through to the central station on the first line. In this case, the 5207 will switch phone lines and attempt the call again using the second line. Notice: To comply with industry standards, this product is equipped with line seizure. Any time the system's dialer needs to communicate with the central station, it will not be possible to use any telephones that are on the same line(s) as the system. Normally, this condition will last approximately one minute, but under adverse telephone circuit conditions, could last for as long as 15 minutes. 5.5 Cable Connectors Power Supply Connector (Pl) Connects the 5207 control panel to the 5197 power supply. Model 5210 (P2) Connects the 5210 zone expander to the 5207. Status (P4) Connects the 4180 display model to the 5207. Note: A quick connect program cable, part number 130294, can be ordered separately. With this cable, you can temporarily connect the 5230 Remote Annunciator to the panel for programming (see Figure 4-1 for connection). 5.6 XBUS Connector The XBUS (P5) is a 12 -pin connector used to connect such items as the 5521 programmer or the 5260 printer interface. When using an XBUS, maintain a physical separation of one- half inch or more between field wires and connection points to prevent damage from transients. 150865 5-7 Section 6. Compatible Product Installation 6.1 Zone Wiring ' This manual refers to fire zone types using the latest NFPA standard designations. If you have questions about the class or style, refer to the NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 1993 Edition. Note: For purposes of this manual, a normally open device is one whose contacts conduct when in the alarm condition and do not conduct in the non -alarm condition. 6.1.1 Class A (Style D) Zones Zones 1 and 2 are class A (style D) zones. Each class A zone is a four -wire circuit that allows an alarm to be detected even after a single open or ground fault occurs. When a single open or ground fault occurs, the audible trouble signal will sound and the 5207 will report the trouble to the central station (if programmed to report troubles). Figure 6-1 shows how to wire a class A (style D) loop. No end -of -line (EOL) resistors are needed for these zones. These zones must be wired using normally open contacts. I�Zone 1 Class A zones are Power limited, rated at 3 mA, 2 VDC. I: I Zone 2 Do NOT use two -wire smoke detectors on dess A zones. NFPA limits the number of watertlow devices to 5 Per zone on dens A zones. UL requires all field wiring to be 18 gauge or larger. Figure 6-1. Class A (style D) Supervised Fire Loop (Nonnally Open Sensors Only) 150865 6-1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 6.1.2 Class B (Style B) Zones Zones 3 through 8 are class B (style B) fire zones. Each class B zone consists of a two -wire circuit that will detect the occurrence of an open in the loop, but may not be able to detect an alarm after such an occurrence. The detection of an open will cause the audible trouble signal to sound and the 5207 will report the trouble to the central station (if programmed to do so). Figure 6-2 shows how to wire a class B (style B) loop. One side of each class B loop connects to a zone input terminal and the other side of each loop connects to loop power. Each class B loop must employ a Model 7628 4.7K -ohm EOL resistor wired in parallel with the normally open contact farthest from the panel. Zone 3 Input is Loop Power Zone 4 Input -pS` o Zone 5 Input \>s , Loop Power Zone 6 Input Zone 7 Input Loop Power Zone 8 Input Circuit Ground Figure 6-2. Model 5207 Class B (style B) Loops Maximum Loop Resistance - 30 Ohms Maximum Total alarm current for all class B (style B) zones - 1 A Maximum Standby Current per Zone: 12V system - 1.5 mA 24V system - 2.0 mA Note: UL requires all wiring to be at least 18 gauge. 6_2 150865 11 12 "EOL 13 14 4.7 K EOL 15 4.7 K EOL16 17 4.7 K EOL 18 4.7 K EOL 19 ® 20 Zone 3 Input is Loop Power Zone 4 Input -pS` o Zone 5 Input \>s , Loop Power Zone 6 Input Zone 7 Input Loop Power Zone 8 Input Circuit Ground Figure 6-2. Model 5207 Class B (style B) Loops Maximum Loop Resistance - 30 Ohms Maximum Total alarm current for all class B (style B) zones - 1 A Maximum Standby Current per Zone: 12V system - 1.5 mA 24V system - 2.0 mA Note: UL requires all wiring to be at least 18 gauge. 6_2 150865 Section 6. Compatible Product Installation 6.2 Four -Wire Smoke Detector Connection Figure 6-3 illustrates how the Model 7620 UL listed four -wire smoke detectors must be connected to class B (style B) zones. When wiring a four -wire smoke detector to the class B (style B) zones, you MUST use a Power Supervision Unit. The recommended device is an ESL 204 for both 12- and 24-VDC applications. 4 3 2 1 Standby Current: 14mA(12V) 28 mA (24 V) Power Class B Zone Input You must nonnalke a# unused zones. For unused dens A zones, strap out zones 1-2 with a jumper. For class 8 zones, use EOL resistors on unused zones. Circuit Ground 4.7K EOL ESL Model 7628 449CT ESL 204 Power Suppeervision Unit for 12 VDC/24 VDC Operation 11 Model Name/# 12 Place at end of Initiation 13 zone circuit. No "T" tapping 14 allowed. T82 824 15 449 Series 16 Note 17 Model This wiring diagram is an 18 example only. connections can 5207 be made to ANY zone input, 19 loop power, or d—it ground 20 on the 5207 panel. Figure 6-3. Four -Wire Smoke Detector Wiring Table 6-1 shows other four -wire smoke detectors that may be used with the 5207: Table 6-1. Compatible Four -Wire Smoke Detectors Manuf. Model Name/# Manuf. Model Name/# GENTEX 624 ESL 445 Series 824 449 Series 2040-12 Power Supervision Unit 2040-24 Power Supervision Unit Pyrotector 304ORC-24 Detection DS200/DS200HD Phoenix 3224A Systems Phoenix 7224A 2040-24 Power Supervision Unit System Sensor 1851B 2851/2851BTH DH400ACDC (Runs off AC power. Interface is through contacts on detector.) 150865 6-3 Model 5207 Fire ControUCommunicator Installation Manual 6.3 Two -Wire Smoke Detector Connection Figure 64 shows how to connect two -wire smoke detectors to class B (style B) zones. 4.7K EOL Model 7628 12/24 VDC ESL Standby Current: 429CT 100 uA 2 1 Alarm Current is limited by panel to 60 mA. Gass B 11 Zone Input Loop 12 Power ® 13 TB2 E 14 Note ® 15 This wiring diagram is an example ® 16 only. Connections can be made ® 17 to ANY zone input, loop power, or circuit ground on the 5207 panel. G)j 18 Model ® 19 5207 ® 20 n Figure 6-4. Two Wire Smoke Detector Wiring The tables in this section show the two -wire smoke detectors that are approved for use with the 5207 panel. Notes for Both Tables 1. If a separate base is used with a detector, the model number is shown in parentheses in the Model column. 2. In the Type column, I = Ionization, P = Photoelectric, D = Duct 3. ID = Identifier 4. The maximum number of smoke detectors is different for the 5210 loop and 5207 loop. 5. The maximum number of smoke detectors per zone is determined by both the current draw and the impedance of the smoke detector. If too many smoke detectors are used on any zone, false alarms could occur. 6. If different models of detectors are mixed on any zone, false alarms could occur. 7. Control unit Smoke Reset Time must be programmed for a number greater than or equal to the maximum reset time of the smoke detector (last column of chart). 8. FOS detectors are manufactured by System Sensor. 6-4 150865 Section 6. Compatible Product Installation Contact Silent Knight if you have any questions about compatible smoke detectors. Table 6-2. Compatible 12 -Volt Smoke Detectors 5207 - Voltage range: 9.34 VDC - 13.1 VDC; Identifier: 12D 5210 - Voltage range: 8.5 VDC - 11.8 VDC; Identifier: 12A (Max. per Loop) Smoke Det. Reset Time Manuf. Model Type *lD 5207 5210 Detection DS200 (MB200-2W) P D 18 12 1 Systems DS200HD (MB200-2W) P D 18 12 1 DS250 (MB2W or MB2WL) P B (A) 12 8 1 DS250TH (MB2W or MB2WL) P B (A) 12 8 1 DS250 MB2W or MB2WL P B A 12 8 1 ESL 425C P S10 17 8 1 425CT P S 10 17 8 1 425CR P S10 17 8 I 425CRT P S 10 17 8 1 429C (S10A)* P S10A (SIOA) 17 8 I 429CT (S l0A)* P SIOA (S l0A) 17 8 1 429CRT (SIIA)* P S1 IA (SI IA) 17 8 1 429CST(S11A)* P S1IA(SI IA) 17 8 1 611U (601U) P S10 (S00) 30 20 1 611UD(601U) P S10(S00) 30 20 l 611 UT (601 U) P S 10 (S00) 30 20 1 612U (601U) I SIO (S00) 30 20 1 612UD (601 U) I S 10 (S00) 30 20 1 611 U (602U) P S 10 (S03) 30 20 1 611UD(602U) P S10(S03) 30 20 1 611 UT (602U) P S10 (S03) 30 20 1 612U (602U) I S10 (S03) 30 20 1 612UD (602U) I S10 (S03) 30 20 1 711U (701E or 701U) P SIOA 20 15 1 712U 701 E or 701 U I SIOA 20 15 1 Falcon 525 P FDT 1 14 8 1 525T P FDT 1 14 8 1 FOS 9374 I A 12 8 6 9375 P A 12 8 6 9376 P A 12 8 6 System 1400 I A 12 8 6 Sensor 1451(B401B) I A 12 8 6 1800 I A 15 10 0.9 1851B (13IO1B) ID A 12 8 2 1851DH (DH1851DC) ID A 12 8 2 2300T P A 12 8 6 2400 P A 12 8 6 2400 (DH400) P A 12 8 1 2400TH P A 12 8 1 2451TH (13401B) P A 12 8 6 2800 P A 12 8 6 2800TH P A 12 8 6 2851B (1310113) PD A 12 8 2 2851TH (B101B) PD A 12 8 2 2851DH DH2851DC PD A 1 12 1 8 1 2 * See note in Section 7.2.2. 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 6-5 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual Program the trouble relay (Relay 3) as shown below. Relay 1 and zone 3 are not needed with this revision. • Program Relay 3 to activate for all trouble conditions and no silence. See Section 3.7. of the 5207 programming manual if using the 5521 Desktop Programmer. If using Step Programming with the 5230 Remote Annunciator (touchpad), select the following relays to program for an installation wired as shown in Figure 6-8: %R Option Select 23.4 Fire Alarm Relay 2 23.5 Trouble Relay 3 23.6 No Silence Relay 3 • Program notification device 4 for the appropriate alarm condition. DO NOT select pulsing bells. 24 = red 25 = bm 27 = yell 28 = om Model 5207 Note: This shows the widng for 24 VDC mode. 46 RslayNt N.C. i7 wired in 12 VDC mode, accessory power is connected to terminal 26. 45 Relay 81 Common Relay Rl N.O. T44 43 Relay N2 N.C. 2 Relay A2 Common f-4 System Alarm 41 Relay M2 N.O. Relay 40 Reiay03 N.C. Rslayti3Common 39 f� Zone Trouble 38 Relay •3 N.O. Relay u- (Normally energized) 3 4 Ole Model 5220 Figure 6-8. Wiring the Model 5220 For Supervision 6-12 150865 r-. Section 6. Compatible Product Installation 6.4.4 Model 5230 Remote Annunciator The Model 5230 Remote Annunciator is a touchpad (keystation) that can be used for English-language programming. The 5230 also provides trouble and alarm information. 6.4.4.1 Setting ID Codes Before permanently installing the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator, you must first set its identification codes. Each annunciator to be supervised must be given its own identification codes. The ID numbers must start at 1 and progress sequentially to 7 (7 annunciators max.). Upon initial power up, the address of each annunciator is displayed. (Annunciators with address 0 will not be supervised.) On the back of each annunciator is a small 4 -position dip switch used to set the ID code. Table 6-4 below shows a representation of the dip switch and a chart showing the positions (up or down) of the various switches for specific ID codes. Table 6-4. Model 5230 Dip Switch Settings ID Number Switches 1 2 3 4 0 * Up Up Up Up 1 Down Up Up Up 2 Up Down Up Up 3 Down Down Up Up 4 Up Up Down Up 5 Down Up Down Up 6 Up Down Down Up 7 Down Down Down Up Not supervised 6.4.4.2 Wiring the 5230 Remote Annunciator Up On Down = Off A 4 -position terminal block is provided with the Model 5230 annunciators to connect them to the 5207. Figure 6-9 shows the description of each terminal that it should be connected to on the 5207. 150865 6-13 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual We: Wiring runs should be made using 189atpe wile BW not exceed 1000 feet (for each 5230 wired). Model 5207 610 \I 22 = Annunciator Output 21 22 23 9-'2-4 5 23 - Annunciator Input 24 = Annunciator Power 25 = Annunciator Ground 7 Model 5230 (sack view) Figure 6-9. Model 5230 Connection 6.4.4.3 Mounting the 5230 Remote Annunciator 28 27 1 26 (U I Terminal 24 is rated at 800 mq 12 VDC For UL installations, the 5230 Remote Annunciators must be mounted on a dual gang electrical box and all wiring runs must be made using 18 -gauge wire or larger. To mount the annunciator, you must first remove the rear mounting plate. To do this, insert a #4 flat blade screwdriver into the slots located on the bottom edge of the annunciator. Gently turn the screwdriver until the mounting plate pulls away from the frame. Once the mounting plate has been removed, you can secure it to the wall using #6 or #8 screws. The mounting plate should be oriented so that the word TOP is toward the top of the plate and facing you. A square hole is provided in the mounting plate to run the wiring to the annunciator. When all of the wires have been connected to the annunciator, set the top of the annunciator over the tabs on the top of the mounting plate. Make sure the wires do not get pinched between the frame and the mounting plate. Press each corner of the bottom side onto the annunciator mounting plate until you hear it click into place. Note: You may have to gently squeeze the annunciator (top to bottom) to align it while snapping the bottom edge into place. 6-14 150865 1'"h Section 6. Compatible Product Installation 6.4.5 Model 5260 Printer Interface The Model 5260 printer interface is used to connect a standard parallel or serial printer to the 5207 control panel, for printing activity reports. It can also be used to send information to a serial computer port. For installation information, refer to the Model 5260 Installation Manual (PIN 150591). Note: The Model 5260 printer interface cannot be used in UL installations. 6.4.6 Model 5295 Signal Power Expander Figure 6-10 shows you how to connect the Model 5295 to the Model 5207 panel. 150865 32 31 30 29 (+)28(S ). Sh~ In Adw ua. (-) 27 Model 5207 Model 5295 r Input I ---\ /- Input 2 12 13 14 15 16 17 G 1`2) Model 7628 EOL Figure 6-10. Model 5295 Connection 6-15 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 6.4.7 Model 7181 Zone Converter The Model 7181 Zone Converter lets you interchange zone types on the 5207. Figure 6-11 and Figure 6-12 show you how to convert class B (style B) zones to class A (style D) zones. Refer to the Model 7181 Installation Manual (P/N 150632) for further information. Jknrper Blocks Model 7181 JB2 W W' I JB1 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB2 ®®®® E ® 1 2 CwaHt prokrW 3 Class A 4 Zone 5 ® 6 + ® 7 ® 8 TBI Sensors connected 91 9 to Class B zone ® 10 Initiating circuit O Model voltage range: 5207 11.4 —13.1 VDC ® 11 4.7 K Otms 12 r� To any 5207 TB2 Loop Power ® 13 (terminals 12, 15, or 18) Figure 6-11. Connecting Class B (Style B) Sensor to Class A (Style D) Panel (12 V) Jumper Blocks Model 7181 J82 IM I JW' JB1 TBI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB2 Ffl? 10 ®®® ® ® ® 1 2 3 Close A 4 zone + 3g]5 ® 6 Sensors connected to Class B zone —_ ® 7 ground ® TB1 8 Initiating circuit ® 9 voltage range: ® 10 15.2 - 26.9 VDC 4.7 K Otrne O Model To any 5207 ® 11 5207 Loop Power 12 (Terminals 12, 15, or 18) ® 13 TW Figure 6-12. Connecting Class B (Style B) Sensor to Class A (Style D) Panel (24 V) - - -6-16 150865 n Section 6. Compatible Product Installation 6.5 Supervised Notification Device Outputs Note: To reduce the possibility of false alarms and transient damage, DO NOT bundle telephone wires together with notification device wires. The 5207 provides four supervised notification device outputs to annunciate alarm conditions. For proper operation, you must use polarized sounding devices with a model 7628 4.7k ohm end -of -line resistor on each loop. Figure 6-13 shows how to connect the notification devices to the 5207. Notification / Device `\ 1 Notification/ Device <\ 2 Notification / Device `\ 3 Notification / Device `\ 4 4.7k EOL 4.7k EOL 4.7k EOL 4.7k EOL Figure 6-13. Model 5207 Notification Device Connections The following tables list the UL sounding appliances that can be used with the 5207. Contact Silent Knight if you have any questions about compatible notification devices. Table 6-5. Compatible 12 -Volt Notification Devices Manufacturer Model Number Device Type Gentex HG 124 Hom Gentex SHG12L Horn Strobe Gentex SHG12H Horn Strobe Federal Signal VALS Strobe Federal Signal 450-D Horn Wheelock 34T -12-R Alarm Horn Wheelock 46T -G10 -12-R Bell Wheelock 7001T -12-R Mini-Hom Wheelock 7001 T -12-W Mini -Horn Wheelock 7001T -12W -FR Strobe Horn Wheelock 7002T -12 -W -FR Strobe Horn Wheelock MB -G6 -12-R Motor Bell Wheelock MB -G10 -12-R Motor Bell Wheelock MBS -G6 -12 -W -HF -R Motor Bell with Strobe Wheelock MBS -G10 -12 -W -HF -R Motor Bell with Strobe Wheelock MIZ-12-R Mini-Hom Wheelock MIZ-12-W Mini -Horn Wheelock MIZ-I2-WS-VF-R Mini-Horn/Strobe 150865 / Rev. 1/96 Table 6-5 continued on next page. 6-17 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual Table 6-5 continued Manufacturer Model Number Device Type Wheelock V7001T-W-FR Strobe Hom Wheelock WST-I2-FR Strobe Wheelock WS 1 T -12 -FR Strobe Wheelock WS3T-12-FR Strobe Table 6-6. Compatible 24 -Volt Notification Devices Manufacturer Model Number Device Type Farads 6126B-U-14-24VDC Hom/Strobe Federal Signal VALS Horn/Strobe Federal Signal 450-D Horn Gentex HG 124 Horn Gentex SHG24L Horn Strobe Gentex SHG24H Hom Strobe System Sensor MASS/24I Hom/Strobe System Sensor MASS2415ADA Hom/Strobe System Sensor MASS2475ADA Hom/Strobe System Sensor MASS24110ADA Hom/Strobe System Sensor SS2415ADA Strobe System Sensor SS2475ADA Strobe System Sensor SS241 IOADA Strobe Wheelock 34T -24-R Alarm Horn Wheelock 46T -G10 -24-R Bell Wheelock 7001T -24 -W -FR Strobe Horn Wheelock 7002T -24 -W -FR Strobe Hom Wheelock E -7025 -WH -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7025 -WH -24 -VF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7070 -WH -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7070 -WH -24 -VF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -9025 -WH -24 -CF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -9070 -WH -24 -CF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E-7025-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E-7025-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E-7070-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E-7070-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speak Wheelock E -7025 -WS -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7025 -WS -24 -VF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7070 -WS -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -7070 -WS -24 -VF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -9025 -WS -24 -CF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock E -9070 -WS -24 -CF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET -1010 -WS -24 HF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET -1070 -WS -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET -1080 -WS -24 -VF -R Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET -1090 -WS -24 -CF -W Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker Table 6-6 continued on next page. 6-18 150865 Section 6. Compatible Product Installation Table 6-6 continued. Manufacturer Model Number Device Type Wheelock ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker Wheelock ET-1080-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker Wheelock EW-EHI-R Slow Whoop Horn Wheelock MB -G6 -24-R Motor Bell Wheelock MB -G10 -24-R Motor Bell Wheelock MBS -G6 -24 -W -HF -R Motor Bell with Strobe Wheelock MBS -G10 -24 -W -HF -R Motor Bell with Strobe Wheelock MIZ-24-R Mini-Hom Wheelock MIZ-24-W Mini-Hom Wheelock MIZ-24-WS-VF-R Mini -Horn Wheelock MIZ-24-WS-VF-W Mini-Horn/Strobe Wheelock MIZ-24-WS-VF-R Mini-Horn/Strobe Wheelock MT -12/24-R Strobe Horn Wheelock MT-24-WM Strobe Hom Wheelock MT-24-WM-VF-R Strobe Horn Wheelock Series HS Strobes Wheelock Series LS Strobes Wheelock V7001T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn Wheelock WST-24-FR Strobe Wheelock WS 1 T -24 -FR Strobe Wheelock WS3T-24-FR Strobe 150865 /Rev. 1/96 6-19 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 6.6 Auxiliary Relays The 5207 provides four programmable auxiliary relay outputs. Relays can be programmed to activate for the following conditions, either for all zones or by individual zone: pre -alarm (entry delay) (not acceptable for NFPA 72 Central Station), fire alarm, auxiliary alarm, alarm by zone, and system or loop troubles (loss of AC, low battery, failed to communicate, phone line troubles, and notification device troubles). Refer to the 5207 programming manual for more information. Figure 6-14 shows the relay contact connections; with one wired for a doorstrike as an example. AUX Power Magnetic (Normally Door Strike energized) Relays can be connected in normally open (N.C.), normally closed (N.C.) configurations, or both. Relay contacts are rated at 2.5 A, 24 VDC/24 VAC. ---------- --------- -- 46 Relay #1 N.C. 45 Relay #1 Common 44 Relay #1 N.O. ------- ------------ 43 Relay #2 N.C. 42 Relay #2 Common 41 Relay #2 N.O. 40 Relay #3 N.C. 39 Relay #3 Common 38 Relay #3 N.O. 37 Relay #4 N.C. 36 Relay #4 Common 1) 35 Relay #4 N.O. Figure 6-14. Auxiliary Relays Note Noise Suppression devices, such as metal oxide varistors (MOVs), should be used with auxiliary relay outputs. Connect the noise suppression devices close to the auxiliary device. n 6-20 150865 / Rev. 1/96 ._-IN Section 7. Normal Operation To operate and program the 5207, you can use either the built-in touchpad (Figure 7-1) or the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator (Figure 7-2). 150865 Section 7.1.1. describes the code displayed here. In normal operation, the display is blank except for 2 LEDs that alternately flash. These LEDs mark the position of each display character. 0 ALARM 0 MEMORY 0 SILENCED 0 TROUBLE 0 AC / DC 0 SET MODE REPORT Trim- XIo e iia F Esr CLEAR ENTER SILENCE Section 7.1.2. describes LED indicators Table 7-1 describes key functions, which are basically the same for the 5230. Figure 7-1. Built-in Touchpad (Seven -Segment Display) RESET aLAftgi 1 CLEAR h,Et.10Rv 2 DEAL. RESET 3 LOAD 4 DISPLAY MEMORY S ENTER SHifT DISABLE DISPLAY TR6L. b SET DATE e SE"T TIME 9 TEST U CLEAR SILENCE STEP" i Figure 7-2. Model 5230 Remote Annunciator 7-1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 7.1 Built-in Touchpad and Model 5230 Operation The 5230 annunciator functions the same as the internal touchpad with the exception of the STEP key. This key is used only by the installer to step through programming options. Refer to Section 2.2 in the Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Programming Manual (P/N 150866). Basic operating functions are described in Table 7-1. Note that if no keys are pressed for 15 minutes while in program mode, the system will time out and resume normal operation. Note: A valid operating code is required for most functions when using the 5230. In Table 7-1, code = any valid operating code, code 0 = installer's code, and code 1 = main user's code. Table 7-1. Model 5230 Basic Functions Table 7-1 continued on next page. 7-2 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 Press: To: Additional Information 5230 Annunciator Built-in Touchpad *Test the system a0 ENTER + code The system will perform a display lamp test, a bell test, and a communicator test. *Reset alarms ENTER + code al ENTER If there is no alarm, this (or smoke detectors) procedure resets the smoke detectors. When a trouble condition occurs and you reset the alarm, the trouble condition is stored in memory until you clear the alarm memory. If the alarm memory is not cleared, the trouble condition is displayed the next time a trouble condition occurs, implying incorrectly that more than one trouble condition exists. *Clear alarm memory a ENTER + code a2 ENTER Clears alarm memory and resets the 4180. (This function removes all memory of alarms.) Reset the dialer �3 ENTER + code 0 or 1 + code 0 or 1 Resets the dialer (aborts a call). Initiate download ®ENTER + code 0 or 1 ®ENTER + code 0 or 1 Starts the downloading process. Exit the Downloading mode by pressing CLEAR CLEAR . Display alarm memory ENTER ❑5 ENTER Displays the current alarm memory. (It is recommended that you clear alarm memory after displaying it.) Display troubles ©ENTER ©ENTER Displays trouble conditions. *Silence troubles or Q ENTER + code, or a ENTER + code, or If silencing audible signals, you alarms may need to enter a code. SILENCE + code SILENCE + code ' /fusing the built-in touchpad, these functions do not require you to enter a valid operating code unless the NEED CODE AT PANEL option is selected during programming (Step 3, option 1). See the Model 5207 Programming Manual (P/N 150866). Table 7-1 continued on next page. 7-2 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 Section 7. Normal Operation luulu /—1 Gurtttrs"C". Press: To: Additional Information 5230 Annunciator Built-in Touchpad *Set date ®ENTER + code ®ENTER See explanation below. The SET MODE LED will turn on and the built-in touchpad display will flash ® indicating that you are in the SET DATE mode. The date must be entered using a string of six digits. Upon pressing the last digit, the date will be entered and the SET TIME LED will tum off. To set the date of 01/13/95, press the following digits after entering the SET DATE mode: QO M1 ❑1 Q3 59 Q5 . To exit SET DATE mode, press CLEAR CLEAR . *Set time ❑9 ENTER + code Q ENTER See explanation below. The SET MODE LED will turn on and the built-in touchpad display will flashF-_91 indicating that you are in the SET TIME mode. The time must be entered using a string of six digits. The first digit is the day of the week ( 0 = Sunday, al = Monday, etc.). The second digit indicates time of day (QO = AM, 0 = PM). The last four digits are the actual time. Upon entering the sixth digit, the SET TIME LED will turn off indicating that you have set the time. To enter the time of Wed., 4:30 PM, you would enter the following digits: MHEM. The 5207 powers up in the SET TIME mode, with Q9 showing on the display. To set the time at this point, it is not necessary to press Just enter the six digits for the time. To exit SET TIME mode, press CLEAR CLEAR . Disable/Enable Zone # + DISABLE + code Zone # + DISABLE + code Disables or enables a zone. (shunt/unshunt) When a zone is disabled, there will be an alert tone that cannot be silenced until the zone is enabled. Fire drill 0H0 ENTER + code 0 or 1 ❑2 ❑0 ENTER + code 0 or 1 Refer to Section 7.2.1 for more information. the fotlowing functions axe generalfy,Jor 102S FX: _. Walk test 0 aENTER + code �2 a2 ENTER + code Refer to Section 7.2.2 for more information. Zone Troubleshooting a ENTER + code 02 QS ENTER + code Refer to Section 8.2.2 for more mode information. Step Programming Q M ENTER + code 007 ENTER + co �2 de 0 Refer to Section 2 in the 5207 mode programming for more details. * If using the built-in touchpad, these functions do not require you to enter a valid operating code unless the NEED CODE AT PANEL option is selected during programming (Step 3, option 1). See the Model 5207 Programming Manual (PIN 150866). 150865 / Rev. 1/96 7-3 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 7.1.1 Built-in Touchpad Display Codes The following table describes the codes that are displayed on the built-in touchpad display: Display Explanation Fire drill (with ALARM, ALARM MEMORY, or TROUBLE LED). O I through 16 Zone numbers (with ALARM, ALARM MEMORY, or TROUBLE LED). EO Indicates trouble with the dialer. E7 Indicates trouble with the EEPROM memory. FO Model 5230 annunciator power trouble. F1 through F7 Indicates trouble with a particular annunciator. A 1 through A4 Indicates trouble with a particular bell output. P1 Indicates trouble with the smoke detector power. P2 Indicates trouble with the accessory power (terminal 26). P3 P3 indicates an Earth Ground Fault to Circuit Ground. To determine the location of the short, remove field wiring circuits until the control returns to normal operation. When the circuit that caused the trouble is found, use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance between each wire in the circuit and ground terminal #52. The resistance must be higher than 100k ohms. P4__jearth P3 indicates an Earth Ground Fault to Power. To determine the location of the short, remove field wiring circuits until the control returns to normal operation. When the circuit that caused the trouble is found, use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance between each wire in the circuit and earth ground terminal #52. The resistance must be higher than 500k ohms. PO Indicates that the printer is out of paper. dL Data lost during attempt to transmit data to the central station. dC Low battery condition. dF Low AC condition. L1 Phone Line 1 Fault L2 Phone Line 2 Fault -O Fire drill -2 Walk test -4 Downloading -5 Zone test -6 HEX PROGRAMMING mode -7 STEP PROGRAMMING mode -8 SET DATE mode -9 SET TIME mode 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7-, 8-, 9- User must enter a code to perform the desired function with these prompts. 7-4 150865 / Rev. 1/96 A0_111 Section 7. Normal Operation 7.1.2 LED Indicators Six light emitting diodes (LED) appear in the 5207 cabinet window. Normal ON I Supervisory condition. ON An alarm or trouble condition has been silenced, but the condition still exists. AC / DC (green) ON Panel is running on AC (normal condition); standby battery fully charged. OFF Panel has lost all power. FLASHING Panel is running on battery power only or AC power only. MEMORY (yellow) OFF Normal condition. ON An alarm condition has been reset. Alarm memory contains data. TROUBLE (yellow) OFF Normal condition. ON I A trouble condition exists. I REPORT System is in a SET (TEST or System is reporting 7.2 System Testing System testing is accomplished with fire drills, zone testing, and 24-hour automatic tests. 7.2.1 Fire Drills Fire drills can be run from either the built-in touchpad or the Model 5230 touchpad. To initiate a fire drill, press Ono ENTER + Code 0 or 1. The system will sound an alarm and report a fire test. To end the fire drill, press the SILENCE key followed by code 0 or 1. 150865 7-5 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 7.2.2 Walk Test (Mode 22) The Walk Test is designed to be used for onsite testing only To enter the Walk Test mode, press MM ENTER + Code 0 (the factory -programmed value is 123456). The LCD will indicate that you are in the Walk Test mode: When a zone is tripped, the 5207 will activate the bell outputs for approximately one second and cycle smoke power off and on for the programmed time interval. (Pre -alarm zones will not be delayed, but smoke verification zones will go through the verification delay.) When smoke power is restored, there is a 2 -second power up time delay before the zone will respond to additional test inputs. The system will time out and resume normal operation in 15 minutes if no keys are pressed or no zones are tripped during the Walk Test. To exit the Walk Test mode, press SILENCE SILENCE CLEAR CLEAR . Note: The Sentrol ESL 429 series smoke detectors are NOT compatible when operating the 5207 panel in Walk Test mode. In Walk test mode, the built-in Self Test on the ESL 429 series smoke detectors may be unreliable. If the built-in Self Test is required, it should be done in the normal operating mode with the zone speed set to 3 seconds or higher. ^ Note that these smoke detectors are only incompatible for Walk tests, not for any other normal 5207 system operation. 7.2.3 Automatic Self Test The Model 5207 lets you select the time of day that the 24-hour automatic test signal will be sent to the central station. The Auto Test (Dialer Test sent automatically at specified times) also sends all unrestored events, as now required by UL. It is not possible to distinguish between old and new events during an auto test. It is the responsibility of the central station to distinguish between old and new events. Treat all alarms, troubles, and supervisories that come in during an auto test as if they were new events. 7.3 Watchdog Circuit During normal operation, the control microprocessor of the 5207 is constantly running programs to check inputs and carry out other routine functions. If the program stops running for some reason, the watchdog circuit will automatically detect this and attempt to resume normal operation by resetting the microprocessors. Each time the watchdog circuit 1101 - initiates a reset signal, it will also sound the audible trouble signal for about 4 seconds. 7-6 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 Section 8. Troubleshooting 8.1 Problems With the Model 5197 Power Supply If you experience problems with the power supply, use the techniques described below for troubleshooting. Note that there are separate procedures for 12 -volt and 24 -volt power supplies. 8.1 .1 Model 5197 Programmed for 12 V Power Supply Remove the power supply connector (P 1) from the 5207 PC board. Disconnect the battery from the power supply. Make all power supply measurements with 120 VAC applied to the power supply. Place a 4.7K resistor between pins 1 (brown) and 3 (orange). Use a DC voltmeter set to the 20V range to measure the voltage across the resistor. The voltage reading should be between 13.5 and 14 volts. 8.1.2 Model 5197 Programmed for 24 V Power Supply Remove the power supply connector (P 1) from the 5207 PC board. Disconnect the battery from the power supply. Make all power supply measurements with 120 VAC applied to the power supply. Place a 4.7K resistor between pins 1 (brown) and 3 (orange). Use a DC voltmeter set to the 50V range to measure the voltage across the resistor. The voltage reading should be between 26 and 28 volts. 8.1.3 Battery Charging Voltage Measure the battery charging voltage at the battery connectors. The voltage should be between 13.5 and 14.0 volts. If no voltage is present on the battery terminals, but the voltage on pins 1 and 3 is correct, the battery leads may be open, or may be incorrectly plugged into the power supply. 150865 8-1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 8.2 P3 and P4 Earth Ground Faults A P3 trouble indicates that the control has detected a short between circuit ground and earth ground. A P4 trouble indicates a short between one of the control power terminals and earth ground. To determine the location of the short, remove field wiring circuits until the control returns to normal operation. When the circuit that caused the trouble is found, use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance between each wire in the circuit and earth ground terminal #52. The resistance should be higher than 100k ohms for P3, and 500k ohms for P4. 8.3 Accu -Zone° Troubleshooting (Mode 25) Accu -Zone Troubleshooting allows you to determine the voltage on any zone input and most system supervisory inputs without using a voltmeter. Since some troubleshooting features are not available with the built-in touchpad, use the Model 5230 Remote Annunciator for Accu -Zone troubleshooting. Note: All alarms and troubles are disabled while you are using mode 25 so that you can trip sensors, adjust wiring, and so on. 8.3.1 Entering/Exiting Mode 25 To enter Accu -Zone Troubleshooting: 1. Press (Do ENTER + code 0. The display will show the default channel number (3). 2. Press ENTER to display voltage measurement values for Channel 3, or enter another channel number + ENTER . (Channel numbers for corresponding zones are shown in Table 8-1). To exit Accu -Zone Troubleshooting, press CLEAR CLEAR . 8.3.2 Reading the Accu -Zone Display The first line of the display will show the channel H; Low Pent in ut number followed b six digits known as Channel (input) ) Y g� Number) "step numbers". Although the step numbers are not 3 0 8 Q l0 7 actual voltage readings, they can identify any 5'U h Rn 8:51 voltage fluctuations that may have occurred. When you momentarily put a zone into alarm, the touchpad will display the Present (current) value along with the High (spikes) and Low (voltage drop) values. This is also useful in locating intermittent connections. 8-2 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 Section 8. Troubleshooting Step numbers range from 0 to 16. Using the 12 -volt and 24 -volt columns in Table 8-1, you can determine if the step numbers are within the acceptable range for each input. When using the built-in touchpad display, only the Present value is displayed. Table 8-1. Mode 25 Voltage Calculations 8.3.3 Actual Voltage Calculations Accu -Zone troubleshooting does not display actual voltage readings. You can calculate the 12 -Volt Panel e 24 -Volt Panel In this example, the reading Terminal Channel Min. Max. Min. ': s' Max. ': Input Number Number Value Avg Value Value I Avg s Value Volts/; Zone 1 3 17 11 11 .3 Class A (style D) 4 18 11 11 .3 2 19 N/A 6 N/A N/A 6 N/A .3 5 20 6 6 .3. Zone 2 7 21 11 11 .3 Class A (style D) 8 22 11 11 .3 6 23 N/A 6 N/A N/A 6 N/A 3 9 24 6 6 .3 Zones 3-8 11-19 3-8 6 8-9 10 6 8-9 10 .022 Class B (style B) Zones 9-16 (5210) 9-16 6 8-9 10 6 8-9 10 .15 Class B (style B) Supervision of: Not. Circuits 1-4 27-34 25-28 4 6 6 8 10-11 12 .15 Smoke Power 12, 15, 18 29 4 6-7 8 8 11-12 12 2.30 Accessory Power 26 30 4 6-7 8 4 6-7 8 2.30 Earth ground 52 31 0 1-9 14 0 1-9 14 .6 8.3.3 Actual Voltage Calculations Accu -Zone troubleshooting does not display actual voltage readings. You can calculate the voltage for each terminal as shown here: In this example, the reading is for zone 3. The Volts/Step Present X volts/5tep ( Table s-1 = Actual ) value is from the last column 3:060 0 6 5111Y R11 8;51 value voltage value (Zones 3-8 row) in Table 8-1. 06 X .022 = 0.132 volt-, 150865 / Rev. 1/96 8_3 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual 8.3 Troubleshooting and System Messages Table 8-2 shows the messages that may appear on the Model 5230 Touchpad display and the codes that may appear on the 5207 built-in touchpad display. For troubleshooting, you can connect a 5230 temporarily if it is not part of the installation (see Section 5.5). Table 8-2. System Messages and Codes 5230 Message Description or Action Touchpad Display or LEDs (Cycling system messages) Alarm reset. Alarm reset code is being entered via the LCD annunciator. LIJ (Cycling system messages) The alarm memory has just been cleared. (Cycling system messages) Dialer is being reset. A fire drill or system test is in progress. Enter (� n Me es QO ENTER to do a manual test (see Table 7-1). 0 SET MODE LED on � Data is being uploaded to or downloaded from IWO Mesas)dri m — 2 a . , ... the central station computer. El Data lost. Communicator has lost data it was trying to transmit to the central station. Dialer failed. The communicator has failed to report. An event is being reported to the central station. m flashes (Individual option names) The 5207 is in the Step Programming mode. Ra SET MODE LED on (Channel data) A zone test is being conducted. O SET MODE LED on Table 8-2 continued on next page 8-4 150865 n Section 8. Troubleshooting able 8-2 continued. 5230 Message Description or Action Touchpad Display or LEDs The alarm memory is being displayed. 04.0 n 0 �1 XXXX = Alarm type YY =Zone number n = The zone number A trouble condition exists in the indicated zone. ALARM LED flashing = fire LED on = supervisory Problem with the EEPROM. Contact Silent O n Knight Technical Support for assistance (800- E �! 328-0103). LEDs and panel buzzer 5230 buzzer goes on and off. go on and off Disabled (shunted or bypassed) zone. (The zone descriptions appear only if selected as a 1 %ii". 10 n F Z p D C R 1 FT 10 ly." programming option.) No trouble, alarm, or other condition exists. Tln1EP WI -1 --VI has been turned off. Smoke verification time, zone 1-16. Sprinkler supervisory alarm. X = Zone number In EDE M SET MODE LED on Table 8-2 continued on next page. 8-5 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual Table 8-2 contimreed. 5230 Message Description or Action Touchpad Display or LEDs Sprinkler supervisory trouble. TRD UB VE: X" X = Zone number 1. An earth to circuit ground fault condition T R 0 !1B L E : exists. Use mode 25 to locate and correct the P: P 0 U E R 3 condition. TROUBLE LED on 2. Earth ground shorted to power. Use mode 25 to locate and correct the problem. TROUBLE LED on A trouble condition exists in the indicated zone. TROUBLE Z 0 H E'' Refer to Section 8.2.2 to find and correct the Q ` X trouble condition. TROUBLE LED on X = Zone number Table 8-2 contimied on next page. 8-6 150865 n /01 T R 011 B L f: One or more of the Model 5230 annunciators is in trouble. Fi K E 5 T R T l O lY n n = Keystation number TROUBLE LED on 7 R O UB L E: AC power has been lost. Check connection to AC power source. R Fit TROUBLE LED flashes Battery power has been lost, or polarity has been T R 0 IIB L E : reversed. Measure the battery voltage and 0 C' B A T T ER, Y ' replace the battery or reverse polarity if necessary. TROUBLE LED on TROUBLE :notification A trouble condition exists on the indicated device. A 1 ' BELL X X = Bell number TROUBLE LED on 1. An earth to circuit ground fault condition T R 0 !1B L E : exists. Use mode 25 to locate and correct the P: P 0 U E R 3 condition. TROUBLE LED on 2. Earth ground shorted to power. Use mode 25 to locate and correct the problem. TROUBLE LED on A trouble condition exists in the indicated zone. TROUBLE Z 0 H E'' Refer to Section 8.2.2 to find and correct the Q ` X trouble condition. TROUBLE LED on X = Zone number Table 8-2 contimied on next page. 8-6 150865 n /01 Section 8. Troubleshooting Table 8-2 continued. 5230 Message Description or Action Touchpad Display or LEDs A keystroke error has been made. Press CLEAR and enter the correct keystrokes. --- T R J A G A t IY A walk test is being conducted. The top line of the 5230 display may also show the zone number in the trouble condition. SET MODE LED on U A L K TIE ST 5 U h R fl 12:19 When the 5230 touchpad is powered up, it will show its ID number (1 -7) followed by the cycle of messages describing conditions that are currently in effect. While the 5207 is communicating with the central station, the LCD will show either of the following messages: (Cycling Messages) REPORTIMG; (Cycling Messages) CALL-IIY'G COMPUTE' If two or more zones are in alarm, the top line will cycle through the status messages for these zones. When the transmission is completed, the 5230 annunciator memory is reset (cleared) and the annunciator ID number is displayed. 150865 8-7 1*01*- Section 9. Central Station Reporting The following trouble conditions may generate a report to the central station: • Low AC • Low battery • Loss of smoke detector power • Loss of accessory power • Supervised notification device trouble • Earth ground fault • Dialer trouble (Device 0) • Printer trouble • Annunciator trouble 9.1 Special Considerations The 5207 can report to the formats described in the following sections. The following special considerations affect all format types: 1. The 5207 can hold up to 30 events in its memory. If more events occur, the first event will be replaced with the message DATA LOST 01. Any older events will be replaced by newer events. 2. When reporting to a 9000 receiver in FSK1 or 4+2 formats, zone 9 will report as HOLDUP and zone 10 as PANIC. To correct this, the 9000 must be programmed for format 6. The 9000 will report the codes only, not the English messages. 3. Momentary alarms will restore immediately if manually silenced by Alarm Reset. 4. Failure of the annunciator bus is not reported or printed, but an audible trouble tone will sound and the display will indicate the problem. The code F0 appears on the built-in touchpad display and LCD reads I sys TxoUBLE . 5. When a fire drill is reset, it will not report an Open Reset. 6. Only the SIA format will report events on the expansion zones 150865 9-1 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual i-• 9.2 Reporting Formats The following formats can be used to report to Silent Knight receivers and are explained further in this section: • SIA • FSK & SK 4+2 • Radionics BFSK • 16 Zone 4+2 9.2.1 SIA Format Printed Messages The Security Industry Association (SIA) format can be used with a Silent Knight Model 9000 receiver. Each message is displayed in English followed by the zone number. Due to limited space on the 9000 display, some messages may be in abbreviated form. Table 9-1 shows the information that is printed at the Silent Knight 9000 receiver when the SIA format is used for data transmission. Table 9-1. SIA Messages 9000 Printer Status of 5207 LOW BATTERY 0 System battery is low BATTERY RESTORE 0 Battery voltage is back to normal TROUBLE 0 AC power is off or low AC RESTORE 0 AC power has come back on PHONE LINE TROUBLE 1 Phone line 1 is not working PHONE LINE TROUBLE 2 Phone line 2 is not working PHONE LINE RESTORE 1 Phone line 1 is back to normal PHONE LINE RESTORE 2 Phone line 2 is back to normal EXPANSION TROUBLE 0 Dialer trouble EXPANSION TROUBLE 1 Printer trouble EXPANSION TROUBLE 7 EE memory trouble EXPANSION TROUBLE 8 Xbus trouble EXPANSION TROUBLE 17-23 Annunciator 1-7 trouble Table 9-1 continued on next page. 9-2 150865 Table 9-1 continued 9000 Printer EXPANSION TROUBLE 32 EXPANSION TROUBLE 33 EXPANSION TROUBLE 34 EXPANSION TROUBLE 35 EXPANSION TROUBLE 36 EXPANSION TROUBLE 37 Section 9. Central Station Reporting Status of 5207 Notification device # 1 trouble Notification device #2 trouble Notification device #3 trouble Notification device #4 trouble Smoke power trouble Accessory nnwer trnnhln 150865 Table 9-1 continued on new page. 9-3 EXPANSION TROUBLE 38 Earth ground fault to circuit ground EXPANSION TROUBLE 39 Earth ground fault to power EXPANSION RESTORE 0 Dialer back to normal Printer back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 1 EXPANSION RESTORE 7 EE memory back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 17-23 Annunciator 1-7 back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 32 Notification device #I back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 33 Notification device #2 back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 34 Notification device #3 back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 35 Notification device #4 back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 36 Smoke power back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 37 Accessory power back to normal EXPANSION RESTORE 38 Circuit ground earth fault removed EXPANSION RESTORE 39 Power earth ground fault removed OPEN RESET ALARM ID 0 Alarm reset with access code 0 OPEN RESET ALARM ID 1 Alarm reset with access code 1 OPEN RESET ALARM ID (2-99) Alarm reset with access code (2-99) AUTO TEST 0 Automatic dialer test MANUAL TEST 0 System tested by access code 0 MANUAL TEST 1 System tested by access code 1 MANUAL TEST (2-99) System tested by access code (2-99) DATA LOST 0 Previous event could not be reported and the information was lost 150865 Table 9-1 continued on new page. 9-3 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual Mable Y-1 continuea. 9000 Printer Status of 5207 "FIRE" is used as an example below. Possible zone types are FIRE, SPRINKLER TAMPER, HEAT, and WATER FIRE ALARM 1 - Fire zone 1 FIRE ALARM (2-16) Fire zone (2-16) FIRE RESTORE 1 Fire zone I back to normal FIRE RESTORE (2-16) Fire zone (2-16) back to normal FIRE SUPERVISORY 1 Fire zone 1 sprinkler supervisory condition FIRE SUPERVISORY (2-16) Fire zone (2-16) sprinkler supervisory condition FIRE TROUBLE 1 Fire zone 1 loop trouble FIRE TROUBLE (2-16) Fire zone (2-16) loop trouble 9.2.2 FSK & SK 4+2 Format You must use either the FSK or SK 4+2 format when reporting to the Silent Knight Model 8520 Receiver. Since the 8520 has only two digits for alarm codes, event type and zone numbers are combined into one message. The first digit of the code is the type of report, the second digit is the last number of the zone. Example Any two -digit code beginning with the digit 0 is a fire alarm. Code 0I = Fire alarm in -zone 1 or 11 Code 05 = Fire alarm in zone 5 or 15 If you selected the 16 -zone report option at Step 14.5 of Step Programming (Section 2 of the 5207 programming manual), the above information does not apply to you. Zone numbers will report as 1 - 16. See Table 9-4 for more information. The 4+2 format repeats after 10. Table 9-2. FSK & SK 4+2 Codes/Zones Table 9-2 continued on next page. 9-4 150865 / Rev. 1/96 Section 9. Central Station Reporting Table 9-2 continued FSK & 4+2 Description 7Z Alarm Restore, Supervisory Restore, and Trouble Restore 30 Dialer Test, Walk Test, Fire Drill 31 Phone Line I Trouble 32 Phone Line 2 Trouble 33 Expansion Trouble* 35 Phone Line 1 Restore 36 Phone Line 2 Restore 37 Expansion Restore 39 Data Lost 60 AC Lost 69 Low Battery 70 AC Restore 79 Battery Restore 9Y Reset Alarm by Code # *Note: Expansion refers to all the expansion troubles and restores listed in the SIA format (Section 9.2.1). Y = Last digit of the user ID number. Z = last number of the zone. 9.2.3 Radionics BFSK Format Model 5207 can transmit using the Radionics BFSK format with 1400 Hz or 2300 Hz acknowledge. The messages that will be printed are listed with the codes for FSK1 and SK 4+2. Radionics BFSK format can only report eight zone codes. Zones 9 through 16 report as zones 1 through 8; zones 17 through 24 report as zones 1 through 8, and so on. Because of this limitation, programming the 5207 to report in both the Radionics BFSK and either the FSK or SK 4+2 formats is NOT advised. Use only if required by the receiver. The Radionics BFSK format repeats after 8. 150865 / Rev. 1/96 9_5 Model 5207 Fire Control/Communicator Installation Manual It is recommended that you use no more than 8 zones if your system is programmed to report in Radionics BFSK format. However, if you choose to use more than 8 zones with the Radionics BFSK format, it is a good idea to make every 8th zone (such as Fire, Tamper Sprinkler, etc.) the same zone type (such as Fire). If you assign the zones in this manner, the letter X in Table 9-3 will be a digit that represents every 8th zone number, as shown below: Digit Reported (X) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Zone Numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ... Table 9-3. Radionics BFSK 4+2 Format BFSK I Description OX Alarm on zone X (see chart above for actual zone number) EO Shunt or disable restore Zone 0 FO Trouble Zone 0 - zone shunted FX Zone Trouble X (see chart above for actual zone number) EX Alarm or trouble restore Zone X (see chart for actual zone #) OtMerZones E9 Test/restore Zone 9 FB Trouble Zone B (Phone line fault) FB Trouble Zone B FC Trouble Zone C EB Restore Zone B (Phone line I restore) EB Restore Zone B (Phone line 2 trouble restore) EC Restore Zone C E9 Test/Restore Zone 9 FO Trouble Zone 0 F9 Trouble Zone 9 - low battery EO Restore Zone 0 - AC restore E9 Restore Zone 9 - battery restore BY Open Zone (Code #) - reset by user code 9-6 150865 1 Rev. 1/96 Section 9. Central Station Reporting 9.2.4 16 Zone 4+2 Format When selected, the FSKI and SK 4+2 formats will send alarms on zones 1 through 16 as 01-16. All 16 zones have unique alarm codes. However, there are some limitations. Zone troubles and restores cannot be completely distinguished from alarms. Zones 9 and 10 share some codes with battery and AC supervision. Table 94 shows' what codes will be reported when the 16 -zone 4+2 format is used. (The codes that'will be reported if this option is not selected appear in Table 9-2.) Table 9-4. 16 -Zone 4+2 Format Zone Code Description Alarm Zone 1 01 ALARM 1 Alarm Zone 8 08 ALARM 8 Alarm Zone 9 09 ALARM 9 Alarm Zone 10 10 ALARM 10 Alarm Zone 11 1 I ALARM 11 Alarm Zone 16 16 ALARM 16 Trouble Zone 1 61 TROUBLE 1 Trouble Zone 8 68 TROUBLE 8 Trouble Zone 9 69 BATTERY TROUBLE Trouble Zone 10 60 AC TROUBLE Trouble Zone 11 61 TROUBLE 1 Trouble Zone 16 66 TROUBLE 6 Restore Zone 1 71 RESTORE 1 Restore Zone 8 78 RESTORE 8 Restore Zone 9 79 BATTERY RESTORE Restore Zone 10 20 ALARM RESTORE 10 Restore Zone 11 21 ALARM RESTORE 11 Restore Zone 16 26 ALARM RESTORE 16 150865 / Rev. 1/96 9-7 Section 10. Manual Revision History The previous version of this manual (Rev. 2/95) has been updated to include the following changes: . • Added UL- required notes about power -limited circuits and wire routing (Section 2.3). • Added System Sensor Model 2400 to compatible device table (Section 6.3). • Corrected terminal numbers in the Model 5210 wiring diagram (Section 6.4.2). • Indicated 12 and 24 VDC system wiring (Section 6.4.3). • Corrected a built-in touchpad display code (Section 7.1.1). • Added notes about smoke detectors incompatible with the Walk test (Section 7.2.2). • Clarified explanation of Accu -Zone Troubleshooting (Section 8.3). • Provided additional explanation/minor corrections to reporting codes (Section 9.2). 10-1 150865 / Rev. 1/96 IMPORTANT: Silent Knight products should be tested weekly to insure complete and proper operation and proper input and output connections. LIMITED WARRANTY Silent Knight warrants that the products of its manufacture shall be free from defects in materials or workmanship for one year from the date of factory invoice if such goods have been properly installed, are subject to normal proper use, and have not been modified in any manner whatsoever. Upon return of the defective product to the nearest Silent Knight dealer, Silent Knight will, at its sole discretion, either repair or replace, at no cost to the customer, such goods as may be of defective material or workmanship. Customers outside the United States are to return products to their distributor for repair. SILENT KNIGHT SHALL NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM LOSS OF PROPERTY OR OTHER DAMAGE OR LOSSES OWING TO THE FAILURE OF SILENT KNIGHT SECURITY SYSTEMS PRODUCTS BEYOND THE COST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS. SILENT KNIGHT MAKES NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS OR MERCHANTABILITY AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BEYOND THE ONE YEAR WARRANTY EXPRESSLY SPECIFIED HEREIN. WARRANTY EXCHANGE 1. Silent Knight offers an exchange program for defective products with a date stamp less than 60 days old. A new product will be shipped to replace the defective unit, with credit to your account when the defective product is returned. 2. Warranty exchange units will be shipped to the customer via normal U.P.S., free of charge to customers who have an account with Silent Knight. Alternative shipping methods are available at the customer's expense. 3. To expedite processing for customers who do not have an account with Silent Knight, warranty exchange products will be shipped C.O.D. Upon receipt of the defective product, Silent Knight will issue an immediate refund. 4. Products with a date stamp over 60 days old will be repaired and returned promptly. 5. To expedite your credit or product return, be sure the RA (return authorization) number is clearly marked on the box when you ship the defective unit. To obtain the RA number, call Silent Knight Technical Support Services at 1-800-328-0103. If no RA number is shown on the box, the product will be repaired and returned promptly. 6. To avoid restocking fees or the possibility of paying the full invoice price for the product, please return the defective unit within 15 days after receiving the replacement equipment. 7. To avoid additional charges, be sure the equipment being returned is free of modifications and not missing any parts. 8. To minimize freight charges, please return the PC boards without the metal cabinet whenever possible. lo�. 3SILENT 0 ICNIGHT 7550 Meridian Circle Maple Grove, MN 55369-4927 612-493-6455 800-328-0103 FAX: 612-493-6475 Features • 24 volt strobe models: 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 candela `• 12 volt strobe models: 15 and 15/75 candela • Horn models operate on 12 and 24 volts • Low current draw: reductions as high as 45 % • Two field selectable/reversible horn tones - 3000 Hz Interrupted - Electromechanical • Field selectable/reversible hi -lo dBA output on horn (10 output on 24 volt models only) - 88 dBA hi output` - 82 dBA to output' • Field selectable/reversible temp 3 pattern or non -temp 3 continuous pattern on horn • Horn/strobe can be wired either in tandem or independently Specifications Input terminals: 12 to 18 AWG Size of strobe and horn/strobe with universal plate: 5" x 51/8" x 25/16" Size of strobe and horn/strobe with small footprint plate: Size of horn with universal mounting plate: Size of horn without nounting plate: Weight, horn only: Weight, strobe and horn/strobe:. C System Sensor 9/96 • Universal mounting plate included with each unit • One screw mounting of strobe and horn/strobe to mounting plate • SpectrAlert strobe and horn/strobe take up zero room in the back box. • Single gang mounting without the use of a mounting plate (horn model only) • Self-contained screw covers • Aesthetically pleasing design • Synchronize horn and strobe with Sync•Circuitn module • Silence horn on horn/strobe over a single pair of wires using Sync•Circuit module ` Sound output varies with tone and output options selected; sound levels based upon UL reverberant room measurement. Mounting: 4" x 4" x V/z" or 2" x 4" x 1'/8" standard boxes Operating temperature: 32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) Voltages: 12 or 24 VDC and FWR unfiltered Operating 33/8" x 55/8" x 25/16" voltage range**: 12 V, 10.5 - 17 V 24 V,20 -30V 5" x 55/8" x 15/16" " These products should be operated within their rated voltage range; UL does, however, test functional integrity to -20% and + 10% of manufacturer's stated ranges. 215/16" X 55/16" X 15/16" 7.2 oz. 8.8 oz. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. A05-936-00 General Description System Sensor SpectrAlert Series strobes, horns, and combination horn/ strobes are UL listed for primary signaling in life safety systems and meet ADA public mode visible signaling requirements. SpectrAlert products can be connected to the alarm indicating circuit of a fire alarm control panel and are compatible with DC line supervision. The SpectrAlert product line mounts to standard back boxes with the use of a universal mounting plate included with each unit. An optional small footprint mounting plate fits to a single gang box. An accessory back box skirt gives a cosmetic finish to a 4" x 4" x 1'/z" or a 2" x 4" x 17/s" surface mounted back box. All strobe and horn/strobe mounting options require only one screw attachment of product to plate. These products are designed for 12 and 24 VDC and full wave rectified unfiltered power. Full wave rectified operation requires more current than DC operation. For detailed current draw information, consult the table below. The horn/strobe combination products are factory assembled with jumper wires for in -tandem operation. For independent wiring of horn and strobe remove jumper wires. When wired for independent operation, the strobe will continue to run while the horn can be silenced. Horn The SpectrAlert Series horns and horn/strobes provide two different field selectable/reversible tones, a hi -lo field selectable/reversible sound SpectrAlert Current Draw Table Strobe only output setting (lo setting on 24 volt models only) and a ttetd selectaotel reversible temp 3 pattern or non -temporal continuous pattern. These field selectable features are accomplished with the use of pins and jumpers located on the back of each SpectrAlert horn and horn/strobe. An accessory module is not needed to make these field selections. Strobes The ADA compliant SpectrAlert strobes are electronic visible warning signals that flash at 1 Hz over their operating voltage range. These products are available in 24 volt models at 15, 15/75, 75 and 110 candela intensities and in 12 volt models at 15 and 15/75 candela intensities. SpectrAlert products feature dramatic reductions in current requirements. SynceCircuit Module The SynceCircuit Module is available for the synchronization of strobes and horns and can synchronize two Style Y (class B) circuits or one Style Z (class A) circuit. The module can also generate a synchronized temp 3 tone for System Sensor's Multi -Alert'" and PA400 horn products.' The Synchronization module allows the SpectrAlert horns on a 2 -wire system to be silenced on combination horn/strobes. SpectrAlert's SynceCircuit Module can be daisy chained for multiple zone synchronization. 'For Multi -Alert and PA400: Strobes must be wired to a continuous source of power (non -coded power supply). - AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) PEAK CURRENT (mA) IN RUSH CURRENT (MA) 24V Models 12V Models V 12V Models 10.5V 12V 17V 20V 24V 30V 10.5V 12V 17V 20V 24V 30V 10.5V 12V 17V 20Vr24VV 30V Candela oc Fwn oc FN7i DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR oc FWR OC FwR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FwR DC FWR oC FWR FWR OC I FWR 15 133 159 114 157 81 128 59 80 53 80 46 79 460 460 450 460 420 480 150 270 150 270 140 250 80 108 92 124 140 1 170 230 220 280 270 3721 15!75 168 182 142 171 99 1 76 92 66 93 58 94 490 520 490 520 460 170 270 170 270 160 270 76 104 88 126 160 1 170 230 210 270 270 75 NA NA NA NA NA NA 145 166 123 149 102 141 NA NA NA NA NA NA 350 440 340 460 330 480 NA NA NA NA NA NA 190 240 230 280 29022 110 NA NA NA NA NA NA 169 200 140 191 115 174 NA NA NA NA NA NA 460 560 450 570 420 620 NA NA NA NA NA NA 190 230 220 290 290 370 NOTES: Peak Duration . N Rush Duration . Horn Only Horn/Strobe -15 cd AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) Models AVERAGE CURRENT (MA) Is HVLo AVERAGE CURRENT (MA) Hiro Temp 10.5V 12V 17V 20V24V Tone dBA 30V V dBA /Non 24V Models DC FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR Electro- HMO Temp 10.5V 12V 17V 20V 24V Tech. 30V Tone dBA /Non DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR OC I FWR DC FWR Electro- Hi Ternp 10 ill 101 101 L4_j4 19 21 25 18 29 26 meth. 67 93 Non 10 ill 101 101 14 14 17 18 23 20 30 2 Tem Low Ternp NA NA NA NA NA NA 11 12 13 13 17 1 NANA NA NA 73 94 Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 12 12 14 13 17 1 3000 Hz Hi Tem 11 13 11 11 16 1 24 26 28 23 37 Interrupt. Non 11 14 11 11 14 t 19 22 27 26 35 LOW Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 14 17 15 2/ 1 Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 13 12 16 14 22 21 Horn/Strobe -15 cd Horn/Strobe -15/75 cd AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) Models AVERAGE CURRENT (MA) Is HVLo Temp Hiro Temp 10.5V 12V 17V 20V24V Tone dBA 30V TOM dBA /Non DC FWR DC RNR DC FWR DC FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR Electro- Hi Ternp 167 95 1 143RNANA 78 101 78 98 75 105 Tech. 93 110 Non 143167 95 1 69 98 76 100 76 107 87 104 Low T NANA NA NA 70 92 66 93 63 94 80 106 75 110 Non NANA NA NA 71 92 67 93 633000 Hz Hi T 114168 97 14483 106 81 103 83 112Interrupt. Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA Non 144168 95 146 102 80 106 81 115Low NA NA NA UK NA NA 69 104 T NANA NA NA 73 94 70 95 67Non NANA NA NA 72 92 69 94 68 100 Horn/Strobe -15/75 cd Page 2 Horn/Strobe - 75 cd AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) Models HI/L0 HVLo Temp 10.5V 12V I 17V 24V 20V 24V I 30V Tone dBA /Non DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC FWR Electro Hi Term178 193 15211811 113 164 95 113 911 1111 87 120 mecti. Non 178 193 1521 1811 113 164 93 110 89 1131 88 122 LOw Te NA NA NA NA NA NA 87 104 79 106 75 109 Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 88 104 80 106 75 110 3000 Hz Hi Tem 179 195 152 183 115 166 100 118 94 116 95 127 Interrupt. Non 179 196 152 183 113 168 95 114 93 119 93 130 Low Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA 90 106 83 108 79 113 Non NA NA NA UK NA NA 69 104 82 107 80 115 Page 2 Horn/Strobe - 75 cd Horn/Strobe - =0 cd AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) HI/L0 Temp 12V Model a 10.5V 12V 17V 20V 24V 30V Tone dBA /Non DC FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR OC IFWR DC I RVR Electro- Hi Terno NA NA NA NA NA I NA 164 187 148 167 131 167 mach. Non NA NA NA NA NA I NA 163 184 146 169 132 169 Low T NA NA NA NA NA NA 156 178$13662 119 156Non NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 157 17862 119 153000 Hz Hi Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA 169 19272 139 174Interrupt Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 164 18975 137 177Low Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA 159 18064 123160Non NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 18 18863 124 1 Horn/Strobe - =0 cd A05-936-00 /"%, AVERAGE CURRENT (mA) Models "I/Lo Temp 12V Models 10SV 12V I 17V 24V 20V 24V 30V Tone dBA Avon DC FWR DC I FWR OC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR DC I FWR Electro- Hi Temp NA NA NA NA NA NA 188 221 165 209 144 200 meCh. NonNA NA NA NA NA NA 186 218 163 211 145 202 Low Temp NA NA NA NA NA NA 180 212 153 204 132 189 Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 181 212 154 204 132 190 3000 Hz Hi Ternp NA NA NA NA NA NA 193 225 168 214 152 20 Interrupt. Non NA NA NA NA NA NA 188 222 167 217 150 210 Low Tem NA NA NA NA NA NA 183 214 157 206 136 193 Non NA NA NA t NA NA 182 212 156 205 137 195 A05-936-00 /"%, Engineering Specifications General SpectrAlert horns, strobes and horn/strobes shall be capable of P ounting to a standard 4" Horn/Strobe Combination Horn/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert model x 4" x 1'/z" back box or a single gang 2" x 4" X 1'/a" back box using the universal mounting plate included with each listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective SpectrAlert product. Also, SpectrAlert products shall be powered from a service. Horn/strobe shall be wired as a primary signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans Disabilities non -coded power supply and shall operate on 12 or 24 volts. 12 volt rated devices shall have an operating voltage range of 10.5 - 17 volts. 24 with Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over its volt rated devices shall have an operating voltage range of 20 - 30 volts. SpectrAlert entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn products shall have an operating temperature of 32 to 120*F and operate from a regulated DC or full wave shall have two tone options, two audibility options (at 24 volts) and the option to rectified, unfiltered power supply. switch between a temporal 3 pattern and a non -temporal continuous pattern. Strobes shall be powered independently of the sounder with th I Horn Horn shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert model capable of operating at 12 and 24 volts. Horn shall be listed to UL 464 for fire protective signaling systems. The horn shall have two tone options, two audibility options (at 24 volts) and the option to switch between a temporal 3 pattern and a non -temporal continuous pattern. Strobe Strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert model listed to UL 1971 and be approved for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. T11 SpectrAlert Dimensions Horn/Strobe with Small Footprint Mounting Plate (same dimensions for strobe only) �21s/16" I Horn/Strobe with Universal Mounting Plate (same dimensions for strobe only) Page 3 e remova of factory installed jumper wires. Module Module shall be a System Sensor Sync•Circuit model listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal 3. Also, the module shall silence the horns on horn/strobe models, while operating the strobes, over a single pair of wires. The module shall be capable of mounting to a 411/16" x 411/16" x 21/s" back box and shall control two Style Y (class B) or one Style Z (class A) circuit. Module shall be capable of multiple zone synchronization by daisy chaining multiple modules together. 51/4" Horn Only 51/4" Sync -Circuit Module -�r A05-936-00 SpectrAlert Mounting Diagrams n" 4..,..1. k— Horn Direct Mount Horn Surface Mount with Accessory Back Box Skirt Horn with Universal Mounting Plate (included with each product) Strobe or Horn/Strobe with Universal Mounting Plate (included with each product) 4"/,e" x 4"/,e" x 2'/a" back box 0 0 Sync -Circuit Module Direct Mount I'.,t;, 4 Strobe or Hom/Strobe with Accessory Small Footprint Mounting Plate Strobe or Horn/Strobe Surface Mount with Accessory Back Box Skirt AOS -936-00 /1—', SpectrAlert Wiring Diagrams TANDEM OPERATION INDEPENDENT OPERATION HORWSTROBECOMBO HORN AND STROBE ® FACTOR ItORNS TO _ 1-) Y SWALLED JUMPER WIRES REMOVED 1-) DEVICE RO 1. Any mix of Horn/Strobes or Strobe only devices is EOL TO NEXT (< acceptable 2. Horn control connects to interruptible power source (q (-I FROM: HORN OR {` EOL < NODDLEI on Note: Strobes must be powered from non -coded supply _ PPnEMv°DUs� (•( (•) DEVICE I15TALLED (_) ( JUMPERS TO NEXT (((< STROBEOR STROBES FROM: ` 1.1 DE�vaU3 > (+) H O (+) H O E (+) HORN HORNWROBE STROBE ONLY N N TONE7(T O (+ (+) (+) I > (+) E TWO WIRE SYSTEM O ANY MIX OF MODELS L WIRED FOR TANDEM H (_) OPERATION FOUR WIRE SYSTEM COMBO WIRED FOR MODELS NENT (HORN CAN BE TURNED OFF OPERA AT THE PANEL WHILE STROBES CONTNRIE TO OPERATE) Horns Silenced Over Two -wire Circuit 1. Any mix of Horn/Strobes or Strobe only devices is Temp 3 Coding of Multi -Alert and acceptable 2. Horn control connects to interruptible power source PA400 Sounders NODDLEI Note: Strobes must be powered from non -coded supply ( NODULE/ c J7l > 00)}1 OL OUfT TONE7(T O zoOT I > (+) DE of OR fACP O CONTROL 1` ZONE 1 IH ZONE t ZONEZ IN, TO NEXT (_) OUT r1 DEVICE OR > ZONE / i� 1 to OT f IN EOL ZONE 2 til ZONE z TIS OI {O > It 1" > H JJ TYPES OF zp1EP F fO > IMI MzoNEzTROUBLE 1` TO NEXT 11yN� SuvE SLAVE p1 STROBE ONLY DEVICE OR OUr ti > O� r0 N vEot1Wr > EOL O O > MOTs 111 be Iampom ly NODULE 2 TEMP. JUMPER ON otNled and le>%'� FACP MODULE z (+) MOAN CONTROL ZONE > (-) TO NEXT O} CONTROL zoOT J > (+) 1 IMI DEVICE OR EEOL O ll TO NEXT ZONE 1 M (-) J ] ZONE t nXs z «RZONE LH > ] IN E t Z Oz j�I ONLY DEVICE OR EOL ZONE2 a %) iy ZONES 0 M TIOIIME f O ` > ZONE zaNz II� "} W MOVau > TO NEXT 10 DEVICE OR l TO NEXT I1y01� rE L JN1 EOL OLaY DEVICE OR. O J ll w0� M vE jM EOL > NO ll WOOLY1 M wE11YM b ryne. M 11Q. Ey31roWN TEMP. JUMPER OFFSET CAUTION: DO not PD *WM *M a module proplaatnMd for' i0d1p. Sound Output Guide UL Reverberant Room Measurements @ volts DC 10.5 i2 Temporal Lo Tone -7 2A Electromechanical NA NA NA 75 75 79 3000 Hz Interrupted NA NA NA 75 79 79 Hi Tone Electromechanical 75 75 79 82 82 82 3000 Hz Interrupted 75 75 79 82 85 85 Non- Lo Tone Electromechanical NA NA NA Temporal 79 S2 85 3000 Hz Interrupted NA NA NA 82 82 85 Hi Tone Electromechanical 79 79 85 85 88 88 3000 Hz Interrupted 79 82 85 88 88 90 Page 5 A05-936-00 SpectrAlert Ordering Information Strobes S1215 S1215W 12 Avg. mA* Avg. mA* Red White Voltage Candela @ Nom. VDC @ Nom. FWR Horn / Strobes P1215 P 1215 W 12 15 126 169 P121575 P121575W 12 15/75 154 183 P2415 P2415W 24 15 76 101 P241575 P241575W 24 15/75 89 114 P2475 P2475W 24 75 146 170 P24110 P2411OW 24 110 163 212 P2415A P2415WA 24 15 76 101 P241575A P241575WA 24 15/75 89 114 P2475A P2475WA 24 75 146 170 P24110A P24110WA 24 110 163 212 P2415F (FUEGO) 24 24 15 76 101 Strobes S1215 S1215W 12 15 114 157 System Sensor S121575 S121575W 12 15/75 142 171 Orkay Mills Lane S2415 S2415W 24 15 53 80 Telephone: 44-1403-276500 S241575 S241575W 24 15/75 66 93 S2475 S2475W 24 75 123 149 A05-936-00 524110 S2411OW 24 110 140 191 S2415A S2415WA 24 15 53 80 S241575A S241575WA 24 15/75 66 93 S2475A S2475WA 24 75 123 149 S24110A S24110WA 24 110 140 191 S2415F (FUEGO) 24 15 53 80 Horns H12/24 H12/24W 12/24 NA 12/23 12/21 H12/24A H12/24WA 12/24 NA 12/23 12/21 Sync•Circuit Module MDL MDLW 12/24 NA 16 24 MDLA MDLWA 12/24 NA 16 24 Small Footprint Mounting Plate for Single Gang Only S -MP S-MPW NA NA NA NA Surface Mount Back Box Skirt BBS BBSW NA NA NA NA Universal Mounting Plate (replacement) D -MP D-MPW NA NA NA NA Notes: Agency Listings: UL, FM pending, CSFM pending, MEA pending, ULC pending Canadian model numbers end in "A". Latin American model numbers end in "F". All SpectrAlert products are designed for wall mount only. Installation of less than 75 candela strobes may be permissible under the equivalent facilitation clause of the ADAAG (Sec. 2.2). However, it is the responsibility of the person or entity designing the fire alarm system to determine the acceptability of less than 75 candela strobes. All 15/75 candela strobes or horn/strobes are recommended for 20' x 20' rooms or less. ' For a complete listing of SpectrAlert current requirements, please refer to the SpectrAlert Current Draw Table or Installation Manual. Horn and horn/ strobe current draws assume horn is set at temp 3, electromechanical tone and hi audibility. System Sensor Worldwide Distribution In Canada: In the United Kingdom: In India: In the Far East: System Sensor Canada System Sensor Europe, Ltd. System Sensor India System Sensor 6581 Kitimat Road, Unit u7 Horsham Gates III, North St. A-204 Maheshwari Nagar Pittway Far East, Ltd. Mississauga, Ontario Horsham, West Sussex Orkay Mills Lane Suite 706, New T&T Centre Canada L5N 3T5 RH13 5PJ, United Kingdom Andheri East, Mumbai 400093 7 Canton Road Telephone: 905-812-0767 Telephone: 44-1403-276500 Telefax: 91-022-8202564 Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Fax: 905-812-0771 Fax: 44-1403-276501 Telephone: 852-2730-9090 Fax: 852-2736-6580 Page 6 A05-936-00 AMIE: REX OWNER'S MANUAL NO. 12386 K m P RESTAURANT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM AMEREX CORP. ❖ P.O. BOX 81 ❖ TRUSSVILLE, AL 35173-0081 Phone: (205) 655-3271 ❖ Fax: (205) 655-32" Printed in U.S.A. KPOM-11 /94 INTRODUCTION: This manual will give you a brief description of how your AMEREX K -P RESTAURANT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM operates. It will give you some suggested procedures for you and your employees in case of a fire and outline some of your responsibilities regarding fire protection. WARNING: THIS IS NOT A MAINTENANCE, RECHARGE OR INSPECTION MANUAL. YOUR SYSTEM MUST BE DESIGNED, INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED BY A FACTORY TRAINED AND CERTIFIED AMEREX K -P DISTRIBUTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMEREX P/N: 12385 INSTALLATION MANUAL, NFPA 17A, NFPA 96 AND LOCAL CODES. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE. To help you better understand your fire suppression system, make sure that your CERTIFIED AMEREX K -P DISTRIBUTOR has given you a completed commissioning list (PM: 13023) certifying that your system was installed in accordance with Amerex Manual No. 12385, NFPA 17A, 96 and local codes. Other document- ation such as drawings, permits and testing by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction should also be in your possession. RETAIN THESE DOCUMENTS FOR FUTURE USE. HOW YOUR SYSTEM WORKS: If a fire occurs in the hood, duct, or cooking appliance a fusible link will melt, causing the system to discharge. Liquid Agent will be discharged into the plenum, duct and onto each protected appliance. Interconnected devices such as gas shut-off valves, building fire alarm systems and electrical shut off devices, if installed, will operate at this time. Consult your completed commissioning list (P/N: 13023) to verify what auxiliary devices are connected to your system. The same series of events (except the melting of a fusible link) will occur if a manual pull station is activated. 1rPiCnL SINGLE CYLINDER SYSTEM ;_qY OUT WHAT TO DO IF A FIRE IN YOUR HOOD OR COOKING APPLIANCES OCCURS: 1. EVACUATE ALL PERSONS FROM THE PREMISES, EXIT -4� in a calm and rapid manner. 2. PULL THE MANUAL PULL STATION ON THE Note: Pull ring pin (safety FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM. Do not wait for ® pin), pull handle the system's automatic discharge to occur. (HARD) a000 3. CALL THE FIRE DEPARTMENT. Regardless of the automatic system's effectiveness, always call in an alarm to the local fire department. IN gov 4. If it is safe to do so, STAND BY WITH A FIRE EXTINGUISHER DESIGNED FOR USE ON COOKING GREASE FIRES. WARNING: DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES USE A WATER -1 EXTINGUISHER OR A WATER HOSE ON A RESTAURANT GREASE ' FIRE. DOING SO COULD INCREASE THE INTENSITY OF THE FIRE ' AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. Your personal safety and the safety of your employees is of paramount importance. When in doubt, evacuate the building. If the fire has been extinguished, stand by as a "fire watch" for at least 30 minutes. Modem cooking equipment is designed to retain heat and the fire may re -ignite even after it has been extinguished for some time. WHAT YOU MUST DO BEFORE COMMENCING OPERATIONS AFTER A FIRE OR SYSTEM DISCHARGE: 1. Contact a Certified Amerex K -P Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems Distributor to recharge and reset the system. 2. Allow the local Fire Authorities and the Amerex K -P Distributor to determine the cause for the system discharge. The exact cause of it's operation may not be readily apparent. 3. Clean all areas that have come into contact with the liquid agent using soap and water. Consult the agent MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET. 4. Correct any items that have been determined to have caused the system to operate. Review and critique the events leading to the system operation with your employees and evaluate the procedures that were used. WARNING: DO NOT USE ANY COOKING APPLIANCES UNTIL THE EXHAUST FAN(S) ARE TURNED ON. (Failure to do so may cause an unwanted discharge). YOUR ROLE IN MAINTAINING GOOD FIRE PROTECTION FOR YOUR FACILITY: Hold regular safety meetings to assure that every employee has been given instructions regarding the system and what actions to take in case of a fire. Document these meetings. Have the hood and duct cleaned on a regular basis. By maintaining a low level of grease build up in the hood and duct, the risk of a fire will be greatly reduced. Have an Authorized Amerex K -P Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems Distributor perform maintenance on your system at least every six months and after every hood cleaning operation. Do not make any changes, alterations or additions to your appliances, hood or duct without contacting a Certified Amerex K -P Restaurant Systems Distributor. Any changes to appliances, including their arrangement, may greatly reduce the systems performance. Do not tamper with any of the system components, including the nozzle placements. To do so may affect the systems performance. Once a month perform the following: 1. Check all tamper seals on the equipment to see that they are in place. ,A"IN 2. Confirm that the "Status Indicator" on the Mechanical Release Module (MRM) does not show a "Discharged" (RED) condition. 3. Check to see that the hood, duct and filters are clean. All fans should be in operable condition. 4. Check all systems gauges to see that they are reading in the "charged" range, (needle in the green area). 5. Check the manual pull station(s) to see that it is accessible. 6. Make sure that all nozzles and discharge piping has not been damaged or moved and that nozzle caps are in place. 7. Check all fire extinguishers to see that they are: in their proper place, fully charged, the correct type and easily accessible to all who might have to use them. Consult your Amerex K -P Distributor for proper extinguisher selection and instructions on their use. Your Amerex K -P System will give you years of reliable protection if installed and maintained in accordance with factory instructions. Failure to heed the instructions and warnings in this Owner's Manual will void all warranties. When in doubt, always contact your Certified Amerex K -P Distributor. WARNING: NEVER ATTEMPT TO SERVICE OR ALTER THIS SYSTEM EXCEPT AS AUTHORIZED HEREIN. REMEMBER: THIS SYSTEM MUST BE MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE P/N: 12385 AMEREX K -P SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, NFPA 17A, NFPA 96 AND LOCAL CODES BY QUALIFIED, FACTORY TRAINED PERSONNEL. SPECIFICATIONS AMEREX for ® AMEREX KP SERIES PRE-ENGINEERED WET_ CHEMICAL RESTAURANT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM GENERAL: The restaurant fire suppression system shall be the Amerex KP Series pre-engineered, wet chemical, stored -pressure type with a fixed nozzle agent distribution network. The system shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., ULC and tested to U.L. Standard 300 "Fire Extinguishing Systems for Protection of Restau- rant Cooking Areas, Fire Testing of effective Nov. 21, 1994. Systems which were listed prior to U.L 300 shall not be accepted. The system components manufacturer shall be registered under ISO 9002. The system shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with: Amerex Part Number 12385 "Design, Installation and Mainte- nance Manual", N.F.P.A. 96, N.F.P.A. 17A, local codes and ordinances by an Authorized Amerex KP Systems Distribu- tor using factory trained personnel. Upon completion of system installation and final testing with the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, an Owner's Manual for the system shall be given to the owner or owner's agent. The Authorized Amerex KP Systems Distributor shall give instruction on the use of the system and hand portable fire extinguishers to those employees designated by the owner or owner's agent. AGENT. The system agent shall be Amerex KP liquid fire suppressant, a potassium acetate based solution that suppresses cooking grease fires both through saponification and cooling. The agent shall have a ph of 9 or less and shall not harm stainless steel surfaces. AGENT CYLINDER/DISCHARGE VALVE ASSEMBLY: The agent cylinder shall be a mild steel DOT 46W x240 specification cylinder, tested to 480 PSI (3309 kPa). The agent cylinder/discharge valve assembly shall be fully charged and pressurized at the factory with 3.75 gal. (14.2 liters) Amerex KP liquid agent pressurized to 240 PSI (1655 kPa). The agent cylinder shall require hydrostatic testing at intervals not to exceed 12 years. The discharge valve shall be made of solid brass with a gauge showing cylinder pressure and a port for pneumatic valve actuation. DETECTION: The detection network shall be continuous cable run using detectors specifically listed for use with the Amerex KP System. No "S" hooks are allowed. The detectors shall consist of a detector bracket made of 14 gauge steel, a link holder made of aluminum and a fusible link. MECHANICAL RELEASE MODULE (MRM): The mechanical release module shall be of the spring-loaded type using a mechanical input and electrical, mechanical or pneumatic outputs. It shall be capable of actuating from one to ten cylinder/valve assemblies using a nitrogen cylinder and shall be operated either automatically by the detection network or manually by a remote manual pull station. The remote manual pull station, detection network and the mechanical gas valve shall all be operated by separate 1/16" stainless steel cable runs through EMT conduit using comer pulleys with stainless steel ball bearings and factory supplied conduit offsets. NO FIELD BENDING OF CONDUIT IS ALLOWED. The detection network cable, manual pull and mechanical gas valve cables may enter the MRM through any of three sides. The MRM enclosure shall have a system status indicator and a window to observe the nitrogen cylinder pressure. The enclosure shall capable of surface or semi -recessed mounting and shall have provisions for applying tamper seals after final testing or periodic maintenance. The MRM enclosure shall have knockouts on all four sides to accept conduit or pipe for field devices. The MRM shall have one SPDT micro switch and wire gutter pre-installed. NITROGEN CYLINDER: The nitrogen cylinder shall be a 10 cu. in. cylinder with an integral pressure gauge which -an be observed when installed in the MRM. The nitrogen cylinder shall be capable of being refilled in the field by. an Authorized Amerex KP Systems Distributor. AGENT CYLINDER BRACKET: The agent cylinder bracket shall be steel, painted red, with a factory supplied discharge hose and pipe outlet. The pipe outlet shall be painted steel with 3/8" female NPT to allow completion of the discharge piping without the agent cylinder in place. The pipe outlet shall be adjustable to allow piping to exit the outlet in any of three directions. STAINLESS STEEL CABINET (Optional): An optional stainless steel cabinet housing an MRM and 1 agent cylinder shall be available. The pressure gauges for the nitrogen cylinder and the agent cylinder shall be visible without removing the front cover of the cabinet. AGENT DISTRIBUTION NETWORK PIPING: Pipe used for the distribution network shall be 3/8" schedule 40 black, chrome or stainless steel. GALVANIZED PIPE SHALL NOT BE USED FOR THE AGENT DISTRIBUTION NET- WORK. DISCHARGE NOZZLES: Discharge nozzles shall be made of chrome plated brass, and shall consist of a body, strainer, tip, retaining nut and blow off cap. The part number, flow number and discharge pattern shall be stamped into the nozzle tip. Each nozzle shall be listed for specific applications under U.L. 300. MANUAL PULL STATIONS: The manual pull station shall be a "dual action" type. Both a ring pin and lever must be pulled in order to discharge the system manually. The faceplate shall be 5 1/4" in diameter to cover "rough in" holes for recessed mounting. MECHANICAL GAS VALVES - 3/4 TO 2 INCH SIZES: A mechanical gas valve, specifically listed by U.L. for use with the Amerex KP system, shall be provided for automatic shut off of gas whenever gas appliances are used. The mechanical gas valve shall have a cast brass body and stainless steel internal parts. The valve shall be a "pull to close" design requiring a pull force to trip a latch which holds the valve in the open position. The cover of the gas valve shall have a visual indicator showing the valve's position. ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE: If an electrically operated gas valve is required, it shall be U.L. Listed for use with the Amerex KP system and shall operate by using a micro switch and a U.L. listed manual reset relay. ELECTRIC MICRO SWITCH: U.L. listed electric micro switches shall be provided to accomplish system output functions. The switches shall be "stackable" inside the MRM without requiring extra mounting hardware. From 1 to 4 sets of dry form C contacts shall be available. NOTE: ALL GAS VALVES ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN THE GAS LINE BY A QUALIFIED UTILITY OR MECHANI- CAL CONTRACTOR UNDER DIVISION 15. ALL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SHALL BE DONE BY QUALI- FIED ELECTRICIANS UNDER DIVISION 16. REQUIREMENTS FOR AUXILIARY OUTPUTS SUCH AS BUILD- ING FIRE ALARM CONNECTIONS OR CENTRAL STATION CONNECTIONS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR UNDER DIVISION 16.